高中英语语法通霸

1




第1章 冠词

冠词可以分为定冠词（the），不定冠词（a, an），和零冠词（即不用冠词，如They’re students. students前就可以说用的零冠词。Water is important. 我们可以说water前用的零冠词。）
冠词的用法上可以分为：特指、独指和类指。


第1讲 冠词的特指、独指和类指


考点1.

考点2. 定冠词的特指用法
定冠词的特指用法：非常明确地指出何人或何物。可以分为前照应特指、后照应特指和语境特指。
I. 前照应特指
定冠词在前面，由后置修饰语来确定是何人何物。如：
This is the book you lent me yesterday.
This is the boy from England.
1. _____ old lady in brown is _____ university professor.
A. An; a B. An; / C. The; an D. The; a
2. I like music, but I don’t like _____ music of this film.
A. a B. an C. the D. /
II. —How was _____ dinner at Mike’s house?
—It was great. Mike’s mum is _____ wonderful cook.
A. a; the B. the; a C. the; the D. a; an
III. 后照应特指
冠词用在后面的名词前，和前面提到的同一名词相照应。（也就是第一次提到某物某人用不定冠词，再次提到时用定冠词。冠词在后面照应。）如：
I bought a book yesterday. The book cost me 20 yuan.
3. This is _____ egg. _____ egg is big.
A. a; A B. an; An C. a; The D. an; The
4. There is _____ bridge over there. _____ bridge is made of wood.
A. the; The B. a; A
C. the; A D. a; The
IV. 语境特指
不是建立在上下文的照应关系上，而是建立在谈话双方共有的知识上。如：
Open the door.
Where is the book？
5. 【2011全国II】As he reached _____ front door, Jack saw _____ strange sight.
A. the; / B. a; the C. /；a D. the; a
6. 【2011山东】Take your time—it’s just _____ short distance from here to _____ restaurant.
A. /; the B. a; the C. the; a D. /; a
7. 【2006北京】I knocked over my coffee cup. It went right over _____ keyboard.
You shouldn’t put drinks near _____ computer.
A. the; / B. the; a C. a; / D. a; a
8. 【2008江西】—I am so sorry to have come late for the meeting.
—It is not your fault. With _____ rush-hour traffic and _____ heavy rain, it is no wonder you were late.
A. a; a B. the; the C. /; / D. /; a
考点3. 独指：指世上独一无二的事
定冠词的独指用法：世界上独一无二的事物前，要用定冠词。如：the sun, the moon, the earth, the world, the universe, etc.
9. We can see _____ sun and _____ moon in _____ picture.
A. a; the; the B. the; a; the
C. a; the; a D. the; the; the
10. It’s _____ pleasure to see _____ sun rising in _____ east.
A. /; the; / B. a; /; /
C. a; the; the D. /; the; the
考点4. 类指
I. 可数名词表示类指时，有三种情况。
A horse is a domestic（家养的）animal.
= The horse is a domestic animal.
= Horses are domestic animals.
但是这三种类指方法各有侧重:
the指的是整个类别，这个类别是可以区别于另一个类别的 (多用于谈论发明物和科技问题)。如：
The compass was invented in China, but the computer was not. 罗盘是在中国发明的，但计算机不是。
a(n )侧重于指类别中任何一个的特点。如：

A cat has four legs.
猫有四条腿。
不用冠词的复数名词侧重指类别中的许多个体。如：
Children usually start walking at around one year old.
小孩儿一般一岁左右开始走路。
Do you like horses? 你喜欢马吗？
(不能说Do you like a horse?)
在类指时如何使用冠词要根据所要表达内容的具体情况而定。
The tiger is in danger of becoming extinct.
虎有灭绝的危险。
(不能说“A tiger is in danger of becoming extinct.”。濒临灭绝指的是整个虎类，而不是任何一只老虎都面临灭绝的危险。)
11. _____ are very popular with people all over the world, but do you know who was it that invented _____ telephone?
A. The telephone; /? B. Telephone; a
C. The telephones; the?? D. Telephones; the
12. _____ trains are faster than _____ buses.
A. /; / B. The; / C. /; the D. The; a
13. 【2012江西】The Smiths don’t like staying at _____ hotels, but last summer they spent a few days at a very nice hotel by _____ sea.
A. /; a B. the; the C. /; the D. the; a
14. _____ is known by its note, _____ is known by his talk.
A. A bird; a man B. One bird; one man???
C. The bird; the man D. Bird; man
15. 【2011全国I】 It is generally accepted that _____ boy must learn to stand up and fight like _____ man.
A. a; a B. a; the C. the; the D. a; /
16. In China, _____ car is becoming _____ popular means of transportation.
A. the; a B. a; / C. the; the D. a; the
17. The invention of _____ wheel is a great contribution to _____ man.
A. the; / B. / ; / C. a; the D. / ; the
18. 【2009北京】 The biggest whale is _____ blue whale, which grows to be about 29 meters long—the height of _____ 9-story building.
A. the; the B. a; a C. a; the D. the; a
II. 不可数名词泛指时不用冠词，特指时用定冠词
Water is a liquid. 水是液体。
Music is an art. 音乐是艺术。
The water in the bottle goes bad.
19. Money plays an important role in ______ material world. But expecting ______ money to give happiness may be missing the meaning of life.
A. a; the B. the; / C./; / D. the; the
20. Since he has no sense of ______ humor, I’m sure he didn’t catch ______ humor in your remarks.
A. /; the B. a; the? C. a; / D. the; a
21. It is known to all that ______ light travels faster than ______ sound.
A. /; / B. a; a C. the; the D. the; /
22. 【2010福建】 It’s ______ good feeling for people to admire the Shanghai World Expo that gives them ______ pleasure
A. /; a B. a; / C. the; a D. a; the
23. 【2008湖南】Have you heard ______ news？The price of ______ petrol is going up again!
A. the; the B. /; the
C. the; / D. /; /
24. 【2012全国新课标】 Sarah looked at ______ finished painting with ______ satisfaction.
A. /; a B. a; the C. the; / D. the; a
25. 【2013新课标I】India attained ____ independence in 1947, after _____ long struggle.
A. /; a B. the; a C. an; / D. an; the
链接：
抽象名词前面不用冠词泛指时侧重于表达一种概念。如上面题中的attain independence, with satisfaction表达的是“获得独立”(答疑qq 329950885)这个概念，并不是强调获得哪次独立。
在可数名词中，go to school去上学， be in hospital在住院；而go to the school去那所学校（不一定是去上学）， be in the hospital在那家医院（不一定是生病）。我们可以看出，不管是可数名词还是抽象名词，不用冠词时可以表示概念，用定冠词时表示特指。
考点5. 名词有修饰语时，前面不一定都用定冠词
I like books with hard covers. 我喜欢精装书。
I like the books with hard covers. 我喜欢那些精装书。
在第一句中，books是泛指精装书这一类书。在第二句中，是特指，所以用定冠词。
在第一句中，with hard covers是描绘性定语。在第二句中，with hard covers是限定性定语，指的是那些书中精装的那些，而不是别的。
限制性定语：指of引导的定语或某些定语从句，他们限制名词的意义，是指特定的内容，和它相对的则是描绘型定语（这种定语只描绘，不限定意思）：
名词被限制性定语修饰时，前面用定冠词；被描绘性定语修饰时，不用定冠词。
She cared little for social life.
她对社交生活不太感兴趣。(social为描绘性定语)
He has always been interested in classical music.
他一向喜欢古典音乐。（classical为描绘性定语）
This is the book you want. 这是你想要的那本书。
（you want为限制性定语）
This is a book you must read. 这是一本你必须要读的书。（you must read为描绘性定语）
26. 【2000全国】Most animals have little connection with ______ animals of ______ different kind unless they kill them for food.
A. the; a B. /; a C. the; the D. /; the
27. 【2012浙江】The development of industry has been ______ gradual process throughout ______ human existence from stone tools to modern technology.
A. /; the B. the; a C. a; / D. a; a
28. 【2010浙江】 Many lifestyle patterns do such ______ great harm to health that they actually speed up ______ weakening of the human body.
A. a; / B. /; the C. a; the D. /; /
29. 【2004北京春】On ______ news today, there were ______ reports of heavy snow in that area.
A. the; the B. the; / C. /; / D. /; the
30. As a consequence，______ fruits such as peaches and pears are in fact related, although they are different at ______ first sight.
A. the; the B. /; the C. /; / D. the; /




写作专练1. 遇到名词要考虑前面冠词是特指还是类指（P. 225)





第2讲 不定冠词a，an 的基本用法




考点1. a, an 的选择
用a还是用an, 关键是看该单词音标中第一个音素是元音音素还是辅音音素。
There is ______ “u” in the word “use”. 这里用a。因为字母u的读音为，为辅音音素。
在26个字母前：
用a的有14个：b, c, d, g, j, k, p, q, t, u, v, w, y, z；
用an的有12个：a, e, i, o; f, l, m, n, s, x; h, r 。
分类记为：
1 元音字母（4个）：a, e, i, o
2 字母读音中第一个音素为 （6个）：
f , l , m , n , s , x
3 字母读音中第一个音素为 （1个）：h
4 字母读音中第一个音素为 (1个)：r
an honest boy an hour an honor
____ “M” ______ “N” ______ “L” (an)
____ ugly man (an)
____ university student　　　 (a)
____ European car (a)
____ 800-word-long composition (an)
____180-metre-long road (a)
1. Mr. Taylor has ______ 8-year-old daughter who is ______ girl for painting – she has won two nation prizes.
A. a; a B. an; the C. an; a D. the; a
2. Susan, ______ university student from Europe, teaches me ______ art in her spare time.
A. an; / B. a; the C. a; / D. an; the
3. A little boy wrote ______ “U” and ______ “n” on the wall.
A. a; an B. an; a C. an; an D. a; a
4. Now he is ______ artist. I have known him since he was ______ one-year-old boy.
A. a; an B. a; a C. an; an D. an; a
5. 【2004浙江】The Wilsons live in ______ A-shaped house near the coast. It is ______ 17th century cottage.
A. the; / B. an; the C. /; the D. an; a
考点2. a/an有表示“每一个”之意，这时不能用one 替换
6. The train is running fifty miles ______.
A. an hour B. one hour
C. the hour D. a hour
7. The new D-type trains can run at speeds of 200 to 250 kilometers ______ hour. The trip from Shanghai to Beijing only takes 10 hours now.
A. a B. an C. the D. /
考点3. help, success, honor, must, wonder, failure, wonder表示具体意义时
抽象名词前一般不用任何冠词，但表示具体意义的“……的人或事”时是可数名词，其前用不定冠词。如：
This book is a great success.
He is a success as a writer.
He is a great help to me.
This dictionary is a great help.
8. Mr. Smith told us that ______ gold medal his son had got was considered ______ great honor to the whole family.
A. the; / B. the; a C. a; a D. a; the
9. Don’t you think it ______ surprise that a German cannot speak ______ German language?
A. /; the B. a; the C. a; / D. /; the
10. 【2007福建】—How about ______ Christmas evening party?
—I should say it was ______ success.
A. a; a B. the; a C. a; / D. the; /
11. 【2007浙江】I like ______ color of your skirt. It is ______ good match for your blouse.
A. a; the B. a; a C. the; a D. the; the
12. 【2012山东】Being able to afford ______ drink would be ______ comfort in those tough times.
A. the; the B. a; a C. a; / D. /; a
13. ______ on-going division between English-speaking Canadians and French-speaking Canadians is ______ major concern of the country.
A. The; / B. The; a C. An; the D. An; /
考点4. 用在某些物质名词或抽象名词前表示“一种、一类、一份、一场、一阵”
如：That’s a green tea. 那是一种绿茶。
They were caught in a heavy rain.
他们淋了一场大雨。
It’s a great pleasure to have a talk with you.
14. —What would you like, sir?
— ______.
A. Two cups coffee?? B. Two cups of coffees?
C. Two coffees?? D. Two cup of coffees
考点5. 用在一些专有名词和一些本身前面要用定冠词的名词前，表示某一方面
In four minutes he was met by an anxious Miss Cramb.
四分钟之后，焦急的克朗姆小姐向他迎来。
不定冠词用于专有名词前，表示某个时期或具有某种特征的人或物。此时，专有名词常有前置修饰性定语。(答疑qq 329950885)再如：
She is now a different Miss Nancy from what she was when she was my neighbor.
她现在已不是与我为邻时的那个南希小姐了。
15. 【2010江苏】The visitors here are greatly impressed by the fact that ______ people from all walks of life are working hard for ______ new Jiangsu.
A. /; a B. /;the C. the; a D. the; the
16. 【2009安徽】We can never expect ______ bluer sky unless we create ______ less polluted world.
A. a; a B. a; the C. the; a D. the; the
考点6. 用在人名或星期前，表示“某一”， 相当于a certain
不定冠词用于人名或星期几之前，表示说话者对所谈及的人或时间把握不大，不知道到底是谁或哪个星期几。此时的不定冠词相当于one或a certain。
17. —Can I speak to Mr. Green?
—Sorry. There isn’t ______ Mr. Smith here.
A. / B. a C. the D. an
18. 【2005山东】I know ______ John Lennon, but not ______ famous one .
A. /; a B. a; the C. /; the D. the; a
19. 【2005 湖南】 I can’t remember when exactly the Robinsons left ______ city. I only remember it was ______ Monday.
A. The; the B. a; the
C. a; a D. the; a
考点7. 用在人名、地名等前面，相当于汉语中的“借代”修辞手法
He is a Shakespeare in his dramatic skill.
在戏剧技巧方面他可以说是莎翁再世。
用于人名、地名、书名之前，表示所提及的人或物与专有名词所指的人或物具有相同的性质。
20. 【2011浙江】 Experts think that ______ recently discovered painting may be ______ Picasso.
A. the; / B. a; the C. a; / D. the; a
考点8. be of an (a) age /size /height /shape /color /weight /type /price等表示“相同的”
（参看P.27考点7）
Those windows are of a size. 这些窗户大小相同。
＝Those windows are of the same size.
They are nearly of an age. 他们基本同龄。
＝They are nearly of the same age.
21. These two Christmas trees are of ______size, but the one they bought yesterday is maybe twice ______size of them.
A. the; the B. a; the
C. a; a D. the; a





写作专练2. 用活不定冠词a, an（P. 225)











第3讲 定冠词the 的基本用法




考点1. 与序数词和最高级连用
在表达“一年级”时，我们可以说：Grade One或the first grade。
可以看出：用基数词表示名称时，基数词放在名词后面，名词前面不用冠词，且名词和基数词都要大写；用序数词表示名称时，序数词放在名词前面，序数词前要用冠词，序数词和名词都小写。
1. 【1999全国】Paper money was in ______ use in China when Marco Polo visited the country in ______ thirteenth century.
A. the; / B. the; the C./; the D. /; /
2. He is a student of ______.
A. class First B. the class one
C. Class One D. First Class
3. We were so late getting to the theatre that we missed most of ______.
A. the act first B. Act One
C. act first D. first act
考点2. He lived in ______.
A. the room 105 B. the 105 room
C. the 105 of the room D. Room 105
考点3. 表示乐器类名词前用定冠词
球类、棋类等运动类名词前不用冠词, 而乐器类名称前要用定冠词。有人想了这个办法，“搞体育的人总是衣冠不齐（没有冠词），而搞音乐的人衣冠整齐（有冠词）。
4. —Tina，could you please play ______ piano for me while I’m singing？
—With pleasure.
A. a B. an C. the D. /
5. He can play almost every kind of music instrument but he is good ______.
A. at the flute??B. at flute?C. at a flute D. at that flute
考点4. 与形容词或分词连用, 指一类人
the poor the rich the old
the young the wounded the uneducated
the injured the Chinese the Japanese
6. 有时也可表示具体的某个或某些。如：
The wounded was a young boy.
7. He wrote ______ song, which turned out to be rather popular with ______ young.
A. the; the? B. a; /
C. a; the D. the; /
8. The investigators found that more should be done for ______ in India.
A. those poor B. a poor
C. poor D. the poor
9. The young nurse is kind to ______ ill in the hospital.
A. a B. an C. / D. the
考点5. The living carried away the dead and the healthy helped ______.?
A. the ill B. the wounded
C. the brave D. the rich
考点6. 与姓氏复数名词连用, 表示某某一家人，或某某夫妇
The Whites are chatting. 怀特一家人正在聊天.
10. ______ usually go to church every Sunday.
A. The Brown B. A Brown??
C. Browns D. The Browns
11. 【1998上海】—Who did you spend last weekend with?
—______.
A. Palmer’s B. The Palmers’
C. The Palmers D. The Palmer’s
考点7. 由两个以上的普通名词组成的专有名称，一般要用定冠词
沙漠河流与群山，列岛海峡与海湾, 阶级党派国家名，组织团体与机关。
（可以概括为“政党定江山”，也就是说表示“政党”和“江山”一类的前面要用“定”冠词。有点琐碎，也可不记，仅用来参考。）
注意：the 与山脉名词连用; 在表示山或山峰的名词前一般不用冠词, 如Mount Tai 。但是在山脉的复数之前需要加the。如: the Alps （阿尔卑斯山）
江河海洋：the Changjiang River,? the Suez Canal, the Pacific Ocean
山脉群岛：the Tianshan Mountains, the Alps, the Zhoushan Archipelago
海峡海湾：the English Channel, the Taiwan Straits
国名：the United States, the United Kingdom, the People’s Republic of China
组织：the United Nations, the Ministry of Education, the No.2 Army Medical College
建筑物：the National Gallery, the Peace Hotel, the Worker’s Gymnasium
报纸、期刊：The Washington Post, the Daily Mail
标牌：the No.10 bus
但：街道、广场、公园、车站机场、桥梁、大学等一般不用定冠词。
（可以概括为“城市设施”类。）
街道：Nanjing Road, Fleet Street
广场：Tiananmen Square, Times Square
公园：Beihai Park, Hyde Park
车站、机场、桥梁：Paddington Station, Kennedy Airport, Golden Gate Bridge
大学：Qinghua University, Yale University
12. They sailed along ______ Yellow River for two weeks before they arrived ______ home.
A. /; / B. the; / C. the; the D. /; the
13. 【2011陕西】As is know to all, ______ People’s Republic of China is ______ biggest developing country in the world.
A. the; / B. /; the C. the; the D. /; /
14. From the top of ______ Empire State Building, you could see up to ______ distance of 130 kilometers on a clear day.
A. the; the B. /; a
C. an; the D. the; a
15. 【2013陕西】Marco Polo is said to have sailed on ______ Pacific Ocean on his way to Java in ______ thirteenth century.
A. the; a B. a; / C. /; the D. the; the
考点8. 用在年代、朝代、时代名词前
the Tang Dynasty, the Spring and Autumn Period, in the 1870’s 在19世纪70年代
注意：in modern times, in the old days
16. 【2012四川】We are said to be living in ______ Information Age, ______ time of new discoveries and great changes.
A. an; the B. /; the C. /; a D. the; a
17. Scientists hope to send an expedition to Mars during ______.
A. the 1990s B. the 1990
C. 1990s D. 1990’s
考点9. 用在“by + the+单位名词”结构中, 表示 “以……单位计”
The apples are sold by the kilo. 这些苹果按公斤卖。
The workers are paid by the hour.
这些工人的工资是按小时计算的。
18. Apples are usually sold by ______ weight, and eggs are sometimes sold by ______ dozen.
A. the; the B. /; a
C. /; the D. the; a
19. —How did you pay the workers?
—As a rule, they are paid ______.
A. by an your B. by the hour????
C. by a hour D. by hours
20. 【2011江西】—It’s said John will be in a job paying over $60,000 ______ year.
—Right, he will also get paid by ______ week.
A. the; the B. a; the
C. the; a D. a; a
考点10. hit/ strike /pull /seize /lead /catch+ sb. + by +
the +部位
The stone hit him in the face.
I hit Tom on the nose/shoulder/head.
He struck the thief in the eyes/face.
She led the cow by the nose.
I seized her by the hand/hair.
21. He grabbed me ______ and pulled me onto the bus.
A. a arm B. an arm
C. the arm D. by the arm
22. I didn’t know why he looked angry when I patted him ______.
A. on the head B. on head???
C. on a head D. on his head
23. A bullet hit the soldier and he was wounded in ______ leg.
A. a B. one C. the D. his
24. 【2008浙江】 ____ apple fell from the tree and hit him on ______ head.　
A. An; the B. The; the
C. An; / D. The; /
考点11. 表示方向的词前面用定冠词, 如：on the left, in the south
25. The DMZ extends about two hundred kilometers ______.
A. from east to west
B. from the east to west
C. from the east to the west
D. from eastern to western



1链接： the + 比较级，用于两者（参看P. 40考点9）
He is the taller of the two soldiers.




写作专练3. 掌握好名词前用the的各种情况（P. 225）













第4讲 不用冠词的情况


考点1.

考点1. ?季节、月份、星期、节日、假日和三餐前一般不加冠词
①Children’s Day falls on June 1. 6月1日是儿童节。
②Spring comes after Winter. 冬去春来。
注意：1. 中国节日，如：the Mid-Autumn Festival , the Spring Festival，the Dragon Boat Festival, the Lantern Festival等前要用冠词。
2. 如果季节、月份、星期和三餐有定语修饰时, 就要加冠词。
比较：have breakfast与 have a light/big/heavy breakfast, on Sunday 与on a Sunday of May。
He left the city in the autumn of 2001. (答疑qq 329950885)
他是在2001年的秋天离开那座城市的。
1. I go to work very early. I don’t usually have ______ breakfast, but I always eat ______ good supper.
A. /; a B. /; / C. the; / D. /; the
2. After ______ quick breakfast I hurried to ______ school.
A. /; / B. a; / C. the; the D. the; /
3. I came here in ______ autumn of 2008.
A. one B. a C. an D. the
4. The children all had a good time on ______ Children’s Day.
A. the B. their C. a D. /
考点2. 不可数名词泛指时（参看P. 4考点3.II 类指）
Water is important to our life.
水对于我们的生活很重要。
考点3. 球类、棋类名词前不加冠词
He likes playing football/chess.
注意, 弹奏乐器要用the。如：
He is playing the piano /the guitar.
5. He likes playing ______ piano, he doesn’t like playing ______ football.
A. the; the B. the; / C. /; the D. /; /
考点4. by+名词表示交通方式时，名词前不要冠词，名词也不用复数
by car by bus by bike by train by air by sea by land （但by turns用复数）
6. 【2005 全国】 If you go by ______ train , you can have quite a comfortable journey, but make sure you get ______ fast one.
A. the; the B. /; a C. the; a D. /; /
7. Mr. Black will go back to England ______.
A. by air B. by a plane
C. by trains D. at a train
8. 【2008江苏】 We went right round to the west coast by ______ sea instead of driving across ______ continent.
A. the; the B. /; the C. the; / D. /; /
9. She went to ______ town on ______ foot.
A. the; a B. /; / C. /; the D. the; the
考点5. 称呼语或表示头衔、职务的名词作表语、补语或同位语时, 一般不加冠词
We elected him president of our university.
Lincoln was elected President of the USA.
The Vice-president was murdered.
10. He was elected ______ president of the USA.
A. / B. one C. a D. the
11. Under no circumstances will there be wage control while I am ______ of the government.
A. the head B. a head C. head D. that head
12. 【2011四川】Dr. Peter Spence, ______ headmaster of the school, told us, “______ fifth of pupils here go on to study at Oxford and Cambridge. ”
A. /; A B. /; The
C. the; The D. a; A
13. 【2012重庆】Sam has been appointed ______ manager of the engineering department to take ______ place of George.
A. /; / B. the; /
C. the; the D. /; the
考点6. turn后跟名词表示“成为”时名词前不用冠词
He wanted to turn teacher when he was a boy.
14. His dream was to turn ______ doctor.
A. / B. the C. a D. one
15. Don’t lose heart. If you lose heart, you will not ______ a successful engineer.
A. turn B. learn C. have D. make
考点7. kind of/sort of等表示种类时，后面名词前不用冠词
kind (sort) of后面常跟单数可数名词和不可数名词（且名词前通常不用冠词）。如：
I only like this kind/sort of flower /bread.
我只喜欢这种花(面包)。
What kind /sort of poem do you like best?
你最喜欢什么样的诗?
注：在口语或非正式文体中有时也可在kind /sort of后接复数名词。如：
What kind/sort of pictures do you like best? 你最喜欢什么样的图画?
16. What ______ are you planning to buy?
A. make（型号）of car B. make of the car?
C. make of a car D. make of cars
考点8. 在一些成对出现的短语中，如：day and night,
young and old等，名词前不用冠词
常见的有：arm in arm, hand in hand, day after day, from door to door, from beginning to end, from morning till night等。
She did experiment after experiment.
她做了一个又一个实验。
English learners, old and young, gather at regular time to practice their spoken English.
英语学习者，老老少少会定期聚在一起练习口语。
17. The farmers went on working, ______.
A. hours after hours B. a hour after a hour
C. an hour after an hour D. hour after hour
18. The students went out of the room ______.
A. one by two B. one by one
C. two by another D. one by the other ?
考点9. 常考的几类不可数名词
I. 学科名词是不可数名词
Do you study mathematics? 你学数学吗?
19. She is ______ newcomer to ______ chemistry, but she has already made some important discoveries.
A. the; the B. the; / C. a; / D. a; the
20. 【2012安徽】Carl is studying ______ food science at college and hopes to open up ______ meat processing factory of his own one day.
A. /; a B. /; the C. the; a D. the; the
II. 表示疾病的名词前一般不用冠词
21. According to ______ review of 44 students, American researchers found that men and women who ate six key foods daily cut the risk of ______ heart disease by 76%.
A. a; the B. the; a C. a; / D. /; a
III. man 意为“人类”, word 意为“消息”，space意为“太空”时，其前不用冠词
22. ______ word comes that China has won the FIFA World Cup.
A. / B. One C. A D. The
23. He left ______ with my secretary that he would call again in the afternoon. He said he would keep ______.
A. words; his words
B. word; his word
C. word; word
D. the word; his words
24. Swimming is ______ in summer.
A. a great fun B. great fun
C. great funs D. great a fun
25. ______ nice weather it is! Let’s go out for a walk, shall we?
A. How B. How a C. What a D. What
26. 【2010辽宁】 There are over 58, 000 rocky objects in ______ space, about 900 of which could fall down onto ______ earth.
A. the; the B. /; the
C. the; / D. a; the
27. 【2013江西】Animals are obviously ______ lower form of life than _______ man.
A. a ; / B. the ; the C. a ; the D. / ; /
IV. knowledge和experience
knowledge一般是不可数名词，但如果有修饰语时，常用作可数名词单数形式，前面用不定冠词。如：
English is a bridge to so much knowledge.
He has a limited knowledge of French.
experience做“经验”讲时，是不可数名词；做“经历”讲时，是可数名词。
28. 【1996全国】Many people agree that ______ knowledge of English is a must in ______ international trade.
A. a; / B. the; an C. the; the D. /; the
29. I want an assistant with ______ knowledge of French and ______ experience of office routine.
A. the; the?B. a; the?? C. a; an?? D. the; an
30. Young as she is, Jane has gained ______ rich experience in ______ society.
A. /; / B. a; / C. the; the D. /; the
31. 【2002全国】Jumping out of ______ airplane at ten thousand feet is quite ______ experience.
A. an; the B. /; an
C. an; an D. the; the



2链接： as 引导的让步状语从句中, 作表语的名词不带冠词(参看P. 126考点2)
Child as she is, she knows a lot of things.
尽管她很小，但她懂得许多事情。




写作专练4. 掌握好名词前不用冠词的情况（P. 225)









第5讲 其他




考点1. 有定冠词与无定冠词的区别
(1) sit at table 吃饭
sit at the table 在桌旁
(2) be in charge of 负责……
be in the charge of 由……负责
(3) take place 发生
take the place of 代替
(4) in possession of 拥有
in the possession of 为……所有
(5) It is out of question. 那是毫无疑问的。
It is out of the question. 那是根本不可能的。
(6) on the whole 大体上; 一般地
as a whole 全班的; 整体的
(7) a most important meeting一个很重要的会议
the most important meeting 最重要的会议
(8) a third time 又一次
the third time第三次
(9) at a distance 稍远些
in the distance 在远处
(10) a number of一些, 许多
the number of ……的数目
(11) for a moment 一会儿
for the moment 目前; 暂时
(12) in hospital/prison 住院/住监（表概念）
in the hospital/prison 在医院/监狱里（表地点）
(13) go to school /church 上学/做礼拜
go to the school /church到学校/教堂去
(14) on earth 究竟 (答疑qq 329950885)
on the earth在地球上
(15) in front of 在…… (外部的)前面
in the front of 在…… (内部的)前面
(16) two of us 我们当中的两人
the two of us 我们两人 (共计两人)
(17) by sea 乘船, 从海路
by the sea 在海边
1. This book tells ______ life story of John Smith, who left ______ school and worked for a newspaper at the age of 16.
A. the; the B. a; the C. the ; / D. a ; /
2. 【2004年天津】When he left ______ college, he got a job as ______ reporter in a newspaper office.
A. /; a B. /; the C. a; the D. the; the
3. Jack couldn’t remember the exact date of the earthquake, but he knew it was ______ Saturday because everybody was at ______ church.
A. /; the B. a; / C. /; a D. the; /
4. —What new subject are you going to have in ______ second grade？
—I’m going to learn ______ second foreign language.
A. a; the B. the; a C. the; / D. /; a
5. 【2012全国Ⅱ】He missed ______ gold in the high jump, but will get ______ second chance in the long jump.
A. the; the B. /; a C. the; a D. a; /
6. 【2010北京】First impressions are the most lasting. After all, you never get ______ second chance to make ______ first impression.
A. a; the B. the; the C. a; a D. the; a
7. —What’s the matter with you?
—I caught ______ bad cold and had to stay in ______ bed.
A. a; / B. a; the C. a; a D. the; the
8. When Linda was a child, her mother always let her have ______ bed.
A. the breakfast in B. the breakfast in the
C. breakfast in D. breakfast in the
9. Their victory is ______, for they’ve lost too many men.
A. out of question B. out of the question
C. out question D. of question
10. We often play football in ______ of the school building.
A. a front B. fronts C. front D. the front
11. 【2010山东】 If we sit near ______ front of the bus, we’ll have ______ better view.
A. /; the B. /; a C. the; a D. the; the
12. Shall we go to see our teacher? She is ill ______.
A. in a hospital B. in the hospital
C. in hospital D. in hospitals
13. He stole the money and they put him ______.
A. in prison B. to prison
C. at the prison D. in the prison
14. He is in ______ control of the company. I mean the company is in ______ control of him.
A. the; / B. /; / C. /; the D. the; the
15. I waited until James and Johnson came. Then ______ began to study a map.
A. all of them B. the three of us
C. three of us D. both of us
16. 【2012江西】The Smiths don’t like staying at ______ hotels, but last summer they spent a few days at a very nice hotel by ______ sea.
A. /; a B. the; the
C. /; the D. the; a

17.

18. Most of the representatives think that ______ the meeting was very successful.
A. on whole of B. on a whole??
C. on the whole D. on the whole that
考点2. 可数名词单数不能单独使用
要么前面加上冠词, 要么前面加上指示代词或物主代词，要么用为复数。
This is pen. (错误。pen是可数名词单数，不能单独使用。)可改为：答疑: qq 329950885
This is a pen.
This is the pen.
This is his/her/my/their pen.
This is that pen.
These are pens.
考点3. 一些短语中
19. —Hey, Mr. Smith, you are wanted on ______ phone.
—Who is calling?
—______ Mr. Green. I don’t know who he is.
A. /; a B. the; / C. the; a D. /; /
20. He enjoys life ______ the “Queen Anne”.
A. on a board B. on board??
C. in the board D. board
21. Mrs. Taylor has ______ 8-year-old daughter who has ______ gift for painting—she has won two national prizes.
A. a ; a B. an; the C. an; a D. the; a
22. —Would you mind giving your advice on how to improve our business management?
—If you made ______ most of the equipment, there would be ______ rise in production.
A. /; / B. the; a C. the; the D. the; /
23. Her daughter was so lovely ______ little girl that everybody in the street would smile at her at ______ first sight.
A. the; a B. a; / C. the; the D. /; the
24. 【2008山东】Students should be encouraged to use ______ Internet as ______ resource.
A. /; a B. /; the C. the; the D. the; a
25. 【2007 江西】Many people have come to realize that they should go on ______ balanced diet and make ______ room in their day for exercise.
A. a; / B. the; a C. the; the D./; a
26. 【2013浙江】People develop ______ preference for a particular style of learning at ______early age and these preferences affect learning.
A. a; an B. a; / C. /; the D. the; an



链接1. 两个名词表示同一事物时只在前一个用冠词
(参看P. 168 考点5 )
A writer and singer is present at the meeting.
a knife and fork a watch and chain
链接2. a, an 的特殊位置(参看P. 25考点3)
I had never experienced so hot a day before.
It was as good a gift as he had promised.



写作专练5. 其他冠词相关（P. 225)




答案：

第1部分
第1章 冠词
第6讲 冠词的特指、独指和类指
1. D 2. C 3. B 4. D 5. D
6. D 7. B 8. B 9. B 10. D
11. C 12. D 13. A 14. C 15. A
16. A 17. A 18. A 19. D 20. B
21 A 22. A 23. B 24. C 25. C
26. A 27. B 28. C 29. B 30. B
31. C
第7讲 不定冠词a，an的基本用法
1. C 2. C 3. A 4. D 5. D
6. A 7. B 8. B 9. B 10. B
11. C 12. B 13. B 14. C 15. A
16. A 17. B 18. B 19. D 20. D
21. B
第8讲 定冠词the的基本用法
1. C 2. C 3. B 4. D 5. C
6. A 7. C 8. D 9. D 10. B
11. D 12. C 13. B 14. C 15. D
16. D 17. D 18. A 19. C 20. B
21. B 22. D 23. A 24. C 25. A
26. C
第9讲 不用冠词的情况
1. A 2. B 3. D 4. D 5. B
6. B 7. A 8. B 9. B 10. A
11. C 12. A 13. D 14. A 15. D
16. A 17. D 18. B 19. C 20. A
21. C 22. A 23. B 24. B 25. D
26. B 27. A 28. A 29. C 30. A
31. C
第10讲 其他
1. C 2. A 3. B 4. B 5. C
6. C 7. A 8. D 9. B 10. C
11. C 12. C 13. A 14. C 15. B
16. C 17. C 18. C 19. B 20. C
21. B 22. B 23. D 24. A 25. A



























5





第二章 代词

英语中的代词，按其意义、特征及在句中的作用分为九种：
人称代词 分为主格（如：I, you, he等）和宾格（如：me, you, him）
物主代词 分为形容性物主代词（如：my, his, your）和名词性物主代词（如：mine, his, yours）
指示代词 常见的有四个：this这，that那, these这些, those那些
反身代词 如：myself我自己，himself他自己，themselves他们自己
疑问代词 用在特殊疑问句中。有：who, whom, whose, what, which。如：Who is that boy? What do you like?
不定代词 如：some一些, many许多, both两个都, everything, everybody等
关系代词 引导定语从句。如：This is the boy who won the race.
相互代词 指each other 与 one another，意为“互相”
连接代词 疑问代词在引导从句时，都称为连接代词，包括who, whom, whose, what, which, whoever,
whomever, whichever, whatever，一共九个。如：
It is clear enough what she meant. 她是什么意思很清楚。（引导主语从句）
I don’t care what they think. 他们怎么想我不管。（引导宾语从句）


第1讲 人称代词
我 你 他 她 它 我们 你们 他们
主格 I you he she it we you they
宾格 me you him her it us you them
形容性物主代词 my your his her its my your their
名词性物主代词 mine yours his hers its mine yours theirs
反身代词 myself yourself himself herself itself ourselves yourselves themselves




人称代词分为主格和宾格。
考点1. 代词作同位语
如果代词和名词指代相同时，常用主格或宾格作同位语，(答疑qq 329950885)不用物主代词。
改错：Our Chinese people are friendly.
把our改为we, 因为我们本身就是中国人。
1. ______ students are tired of doing so much homework. We had better make it known to our teachers.
A. Our B. We C. Us D. Ours
2. 【2007湖南】To save class time, our teacher has ______ students do half of the exercise in class and complete the other half for homework.
A. us B. we C. our D. ours
考点2. 用人称代词宾格代替主格的情况
1 口语中作表语的人称代词一般用宾格，不用主格。
—Who is it? —It’s me.
2 在比较句型中，as和than后的主格可以用宾格代替。
I am taller than she/her.
He is as tall as she/her.
3 but, except作“除了……”解并且位于主语之后时，后面可以跟主格也可跟宾格。
Nobody but/except he/him knew it.
4 人称代词单独出现时，常用宾格。
Who runs faster, you or me?
3. —Susan, go and join your sister cleaning the yard.
—Why ____? John is sitting there doing nothing.
A. him B. he C. I D. me
4. 【2009山东】—Poor Steve! I could hardly recognize him just now!
—______. He has changed so much.
A. Never mind B. No problem
C. Not at all D. Me neither






第2讲 指示代词




指示代词一般指：this, that, these和those
考点1. this, that
that则指前面讲到过的事物，有承上的作用, this常指后面要讲到的事物，有启下的作用。
I want to tell you this: the English party will be held on Saturday afternoon.
He hurt his leg yesterday. That’s why he didn’t come.

1. 【2007浙江】—He got his first book published. It turned out to be a bestseller.
—When was ______?
—______ was in 2000 when he was still in college.
A. that; This B. this; It
C. it; This D. that; It
2. 【2008辽宁】—Could you tell me how to get to Victoria Street?
—Victoria Street? ____ is where the Grand Theatre is.
A. Such B. There C. That D. This
考点2. that 指代前面提到的名词，后总是跟限制性的后置修饰语, 复数时要用those
that可以代指可数名词也可代指不可数名词。
it和that都可替代“the+单数名词（可数或不可数）”，都是特指，(答疑qq 329950885)但it指前面提到的“同一”事物，而that是指前面提到的“同类”事物。如：
1 【2001全国】The Parkers bought a new house but ____will need a lot of work before they can move in.
A. they B. it C. one D. which
2 【1999全国】Few pleasures can equal______ of a cool drink on a hot day.
A. some B. any C. that D. those

分析：①选B, 因为指的同一事物。②选C 。that替代the pleasure，与前面提到的同属“快乐的事”，但却是不同的事。
如果前面名词是可数名词复数时，要用those而不用that。
有时也用one（ones）代替前面出现的名词，但只能代替可数名词。如：
The book on the table is more interesting than that (或the one) on the desk.
A box made of steel is stronger than one made of wood.

3. 【2013四川】The traffic on the main streets has a longer green signal than ______ on the small ones.
A. one B. this C. that D. it
4. 【2013辽宁】To her joy, Della earned first the trust of her students and then ______ of her colleagues.
A. that B. one C. ones D. those
5. 【2008全国I】 The English spoken in the United States is only slightly different from ______ spoken in England.
A. which B. what C. that D. the one
6. 【2009江苏】Nine in ten parents said there were significant differences in their approach to educating their children compared with ______ of their parents.
A. those B. one C. both D. that
7. 【2012浙江】Studying Wendy’s menu, I found that many of the items are similar to ____of McDonald’s.
A. those B. ones C. any D. all
8. 【2013天津】At our factory there are a few machines similar to ______ described in this magazine.
A. them B. these C. those D. ones





第3讲 不定代词（一）


考点1.

没有明确指定代替任何特定名词或形容词的词叫做不定代词，常用的不定代词有：
all, any, another, both, each, every, either, every, few, little, many, much, no, none, neither, one, other, some以及由 some, any, no, very 和 body, one, thing 构成的复合词
考点1. one不可指代不可数名词
1. 【2011重庆】—Silly me! I forget what my luggage looks like.
—What do you think of ______ over there?
A. the one B. this C. it D. that
2. Our furniture is much cheaper than ______ you bought last year.
A. one B. ones
C. that D. those
考点2. one作同位语，等于a/an＋名词
3. 【2002全国】Meeting my uncle after all these years was an unforgettable moment, ______ I will always treasure.
A. that B. one C. it D. what
4. For Tim this was the beginning of a new life, ______ he thought he would never see.
A. what B. that C. one D. it
5. —Can I help you?
—I’d like to buy a gift for my mother, ______ at a proper price but of great use.
A. that B. one C. anyone D. everything
考点3. one, it, the one, the ones的区别
在指代时，one可以替换为：a+名词, 而it指特定的某一个，相当于the+名词。在the one和the ones中，one指代前面提到的可数名词。

6. 【2000全国】—Why don’t we take a little break？
—Didn’t we just have ______?
A. it? B. that C. one D. this
7. 【2011福建】We have various summer camps for your holidays, you can choose ______ based on your own interests.
A. either B. each C. one D. it
8. 【1992全国】Mr. Zhang gave the textbooks to all the pupils except ______ who had already taken them.
A. the ones B. ones C. some D. the others
9. 【2005江西】Cars do cause us some health problems —in fact far more serious ___ than mobile phones do.
A. one B. ones C. it D. those
10. 【2005浙江】 We’ve been looking at the houses but haven’t found ______ we like yet.
A. one B. ones C. it? D. them?
11. 【2007陕西】—There is still a copy of the book in the library. Will you go and borrow ______?
—No, I’d rather buy ______ in the bookstore.
A. it; one B. one; one
C. one; it D. it; it
考点4. each, every表示“每一”时的区别
1 从数量上：each用于两个或两个以上的人或物， 而every用于三个或三个以上的人或物。也就是说，只有两个时，必须用each, 三个及三个以上时，用each和every都行。
Each/Every student has a computer.
2 从意义上：each侧重于个体，强调“每一个”, 而every侧重于整体，强调 “全部”。
Each student has a computer. 每个学生都有台电脑。
Every student has a computer. 所有的学生都有电脑。
3 从词性上：every只能作形容词，而each可作代词、形容词和副词。
Each boy has eaten one apple. (each为形容词)
Each of them has eaten one apple. （each为代词）
They each have eaten one apple. （each为代词，作同位语）
They have eaten one apple each. （each为副词）
改错：
①There are many tall trees on every side of the road.
②Every of the students in our class has a dictionary.
改为：
①把every改为each, 因为路只有两条边，而every用于三者及三者以上。
②把Every 改为Each，或在Every后加one。
12. 【2012上海】When he took his gloves off, I noticed that ______ one had his name written inside.
A. each B. every C. other D. another
考点5. any, either表示“任何一个”时的区别
1 any表示“任何”的意思, 用于三者及三者以上。
Any child can do that.（定语）
You may take any of them.（宾语）
2 either是“两者中任何一个”的意思，可修饰或代替单数可数名词。如：
Here are two pens. You may take either of them. （宾语）
3 each指两者时可与either互换。如：
There are many trees on either/each side of the road.
13. 【2008上海】 Do you want tea or coffee? ______, I really don’t mind.
A. None B. Neither C. Either D. Or
14. 【2009陕西】Jane was asked a lot of questions, but she didn’t answer ______ of them.
A. other B. any C. none D. some
15. 【2010重庆】He had lost his temper and his health in the war and never found ______ of them again.
A. neither B. either C. each D. all
16. 【2013山东】I’ve lived in New York and Chicago, but don’t like ______ of them very much.
A. either B. any C. each D. another
考点6. neither, both与 all, none (both与all表示部分否定)
1 both用于否定句，表示部分否定；表示完全否定时，用neither。如：
Both of us are not teachers.我们俩并不都是教师。
Neither of us is a teacher. 我们俩都不是教师。
2 all 用于否定句，表示部分否定，完全否定用none。如：
Not all the ants go out for food.(or: All the ants don’t go out for food.)
并不是所有的蚂蚁都出去寻找食物。
None of the money is mine.这钱一分也不是我的。
3 另外，neither是“两者中没有一个”的意思，可以作形容词，修饰或代替单数可数名词，它所修饰的名词用单数形式，(答疑qq 329950885)后面的谓语也用单数形式。如Neither boy knows French.
17. ______ of them do not drink wine. A bottle will be enough.
A. No B. None C. All D. Every one
18. 【2013新课标Ⅱ】It’s an either-or situation — we can buy a new car this year or we can go on holiday but we can’t do ______.
A. others B. either C. another D. both
19. 【2012全国新课标】Larry asks Bill and Peter to go on a picnic with him, but ______ of them wants to, because they have work to do.
A. either B. any C. neither D. none
20. 【2012重庆】—John, when shall we meet again, Thursday or Friday?
—______. I’ll be off to London then.
A. Either B. Neither C. Both D. None
21. 【1998全国】 —Can you come on Monday or Tuesday?
—I’m afraid ______ day is possible.
A. either B. neither C. some D. any
考点7. another, other, others, the other, the others,
the rest的区别
1 “the other +名词复数” (或用the others) 表示“其余的全部……”；“other + 复数名词（或用others）”泛指“其他的（别的）人或物”（并不有意强调全部）。 如：
Five of the pencils are red, the others (the other pens) are yellow.
Some are singing, and others are dancing.（others泛指其余的，指其余的绝大部分。暗示可能有极少数既没唱歌也没跳舞。如果用the others则指剩余的全部，表示其余的无一例外都在跳舞。）
some…, some…, some…, others…，意为“一些……一些……一些”。
2 the other 强调剩下的这一个，此时只有一个；常出现在one…the other中, 用于两者之间。如：He got two books; one is?a textbook, the other is a novel.
也可用于其他表示“只剩下这一个”的情况。如：There were three boys in the classroom. One is Tom, another is John, and the other is Ken.
another修饰或代替单数可数名词，用于“三个或三个以上”，指代剩下的两个或两个以上中的一个。
This coat is too dark. Please show me another.（宾语，外衣总数为三件及三件以上。除去这个外衣之外，剩下的起码有两件；如果只剩一件的话，就要用the other。）
one … another/a second… a third…the other…常用于列举，意为“一个……一个……一个……一个，剩下的那一个”，用于三者或三者以上的排列。
3 another还可表示“再，又”。（参看：P. 32 many more + 名词，much more + 名词，与another）

4 the rest既可代替可数名词，也可代替不可数名词, 而another, other, others, the other(s)只能代替可数 名词。
5 else只能放在复合不定代词或者疑问词后。如：
Did you see anybody else? 你还看见别的人吗？
Who else was at the party? 聚会上还有谁？
6 each other, one another(相互)。按传统语法，each other 指两者；而 one another 指三者或三者以上。但在现代英语中，两者常可互换。如：
You should help each other (one another).
你们应该互相帮助。
We know each other’s (one another’s) weak points. 我们都彼此了解对方的缺点。
7 one after another(一个接一个), 如：I’m not surprised he’s feeling ill—he was eating one ice-cream after another!
8 “any other ＋单数名词”(别的 / 其他的任何一个)
Shanghai is larger than any other city in China.
9 one way or another “以某种方式”；“无论如何”。Everyone at the party was related (in) one way or another.
These bills have to be paid one way or another.
22. 【2011陕西】—Would you get me a bar of chocolate from the kitchen, dear?
—______ one?
A. Other B. Every
C. Another D. More
23. 【2000全国】If you want to change for a double room you’ll have to pay ______ $ 15.
A. another B. other
C. more D. each
24. 【2010安徽】You are the team star! Working with ______ is really your cup of tea.
A. both B. either
C. others D. the other
25. 【2005上海】No progress was made in the trade talk as neither side would accept the conditions of ______.
A. others B. the other
C. either D. another
26. I have done much of the work. Could you please finish ______ in two days?
A. the rest B. the other
C. another D. the others
27. 【2013重庆】Recycling is one way to protect the environment; reusing is ______.
A. another B. the other
C. one another D. one
28. 【2009重庆】Over the past 20 years, the Internet helped change our world in ______ way or another for the better.
A. any B. one
C. every D. either





第4讲 不定代词（二）


考点8.

考点1. something, anything, everything与somebody, anybody, everybody
在everyone (everybody)和everything中，every虽然表示“每一个”，但它侧重于“全部的，所有的”。因此，everyone (everybody)和everything虽然意为“每个人”，“每件事/物”，但却侧重于表示“全部的、所有的”。它们表示的是“整体”的概念。如：
Is everyone here? 大家都到齐了吗？
Everything goes well. 一切顺利。
在someone (somebody)和something中，some表示“特定”的某一个，属于“ 不确定特指”，即：虽然没有指明是哪一个，但也是“特定”的某一个，并且只能是“这个”而不能是别的任何一个。因此，someone (somebody)和something意为“某个人”“某件事/物”。它们表达的是“特定”的“个体”概念。如：
Somebody broke the glass yesterday.
昨天有人把杯子打碎了。
Something is wrong with the machine.
机器出故障了。
在anyone (anybody)和anything中，any是“任何一个”的意思。它们表达的是不确定的“个体”概念，即：所代指的可以是“这一个”，也可以是其他任何一个。它们意为“任何一个人”“任何一件事/物”。如：
Has anybody been to Hong Kong in our class?
我们班有没有人去过香港？
Is anything wrong with you? 你怎么了？
1. I agree with most of what you said, but I don’t agree with ______.
A. everything B. anything
C. something D. nothing
2. —What an amazing film! It’s the most interesting film I’ve ever seen.
—But I’m sure it won’t interest ______ .
A. somebody B. anybody
C. everybody D. nobody
3. —Do you have ______ at home now, Stella?
—No, we still have to get several pounds of fruit and some tea.
A. something B. everything
C. nothing D. anything
4. 【2008山东】Make sure you’ve got the passports and tickets and ______ before you leave.
A. something B. anything
C. everything D. nothing
5. 【2005全国1】We haven’t enough books for ______; some of you will have to share.
A. somebody B. anybody ?
C. everybody D. nobody
6. 【2005湖北】First , it is important to recognize what kind of person you are and which special qualities make you different from ______.
A. everyone else B. the other?
C. someone else D. the rest
7. —Do you mind if Charlie borrows a few hundred dollars from you?
—I’m afraid I do. I’ll be glad to lend money to ________ but Charlie.
A. someone???? B. everyone
C. anyone??? D. no one
8. 【2007上海】The mayor has offered a reward of
$ 5, 000 to ______ who can capture the tiger alive or dead.
A. both B. others C. anyone D. another
9. His study is better than _________.
A. anyone else’s??? B. anyone else???
C. anyone’s else??? D. everyone else
10. —What happened yesterday?
—I don’t think ______ happened.
A. anything??? B. everything???
C. nothing??? D. something
11. He cares so little about his meals that _____ will do so long as it fills his stomach.
A everything??? B something? ??
C anything??? D nothing
12. 【2007 重庆】Jim sold most of his things. He has hardly ______ left in the house.
A. anything B. everything
C. nothing D. something
13. ______ of us can do everything, but all of us can do
______.
A. None; something B. Some; everything
C. Few; something D. Few; nothing
14. 【2005安徽】I don’t think we’ve met before. You’re taking me for ______.
A. some other B. someone else
C. other person D. one other
15. ________ in the office had made a mistake, and the firm regretted causing the customer inconvenience.
A. Someone??????????? B. Anyone????????????????
C. Everyone???????????????? D. No one
考点2. everyone 与every one
everyone是一个词，只用来指人，等于 everybody，在它后面不能跟介词of； every one是两个词，既可用来指人，也可用来指物，等于each one，后面可跟介词of。请看以下例句：
Everyone of the children likes this game.（误）
每个孩子都喜欢这个游戏。
Every one of the children likes this game.（正）
链接: everyday日常的，every day每天
He recites everyday English every day.
他每天背日常英语。
16. _____ likes being praised. _____ of them especially likes being praised.
A. Everyone; Every one
B. Every one; Everyone
C. Everyone; Everyone
D. Every one; Every one
考点3. none, no one, nobody的区别
1 no one，nobody只指人，nothing 指没有什么事物，none 兼指人和物。
2 用作主语 (?http:?/??/?www.yywords.com?/?Article?/?basic?/?Index.html" \t "_blank?)时，no one, nobody后的谓语动词一般用单数 (?http:?/??/?www.yywords.com?/?Article?/?cet6?/?Index.html" \t "_blank?), 按传统语法，两者之后均不能接 of 短语。none代替不可数名词作主语时，谓语动词用单数形式；代替可数名词作主语时，谓语动词可用单数也可用复数形式。None后可跟of短语。如：
No one （Nobody） knows. 谁也不知道。
No one （Nobody） likes it. 没人喜欢它。
None of the money has been found.
那些钱都没被找到。
None of the trees grow/grows well.
那些树长得都不好。
3 none 往往暗示有一定的范围（这种范围通常就表现在其后的 of 短语上），着眼于数量概念，“特指的人或物一个也没有，一点儿也没有”。而 no one 或 nobody 则不暗示这种范围，即指“谁都没有。”
体会下面的两组对话：
A：Did any of your friends come to see you?
你的朋友当中有谁来看过你吗?
B：None. 一个也没来。
A：Did anyone come to see you? 有人来看过你吗?
B：No one (Nobody). 谁也没来。
4 在回答 how many 或 how much 的提问时，通常用 none，而在回答 who 的提问时，通常用 no one 或 nobody。体会：
A：How many English books have you read? 你读
过多少本英文书?
B：None. 一本也没读。
A：How much money did you give her? 你给了她
多少钱?
B：None. 一分也没给。
A：Who went to see the film? 谁去看电影了?
B：No one (Nobody). 谁也没去。　
17. —How many elephants did you see?
—______.
A. None B. No one
C. Nothing D. Not many
18. —Who was in the building when the fire broke out?
—______.
A. None B. No one
C. Not any one D. Not anybody
19. 【2008浙江】—I’d like some more cheese.
—Sorry, there’s ______ left.
A. some B. none
C. a little D. few
20. 【2009上海】—Wow! You’ve got so many clothes.
—But ______ of them are in fashion now.
A. all B. both C. neither D. none
21. 【2012江西】My brother would like to buy a good watch but ______ was available from that shop.
A. nothing B. none C. no one D. neither
22. 【2013陕西】Although Rosemary had suffered from a serious illness for years, she lost ______ of her enthusiasm for life.
A. some B. neither
C. none D. all
考点4. something, somebody, nobody的特殊用法
1 something意为“重要的人物”, 相当于 somebody。
She thinks she’s something since she won the beauty contest.
选美比赛得了奖，她就自以为了不起了。
链接：He thinks he is somebody but he is nobody.
他自以为了不起，实际他一文不名。
2 something还可表示“重要的事物”。
These paintings were really something.
这些画确实出色。
I think you may have something there.
我认为(答疑qq 329950885)在那方面你可能是有道理的。
3 something of a（an）+n.表示“可以说是一个……”的意思。
Dr. James is a scholar and something of a philosopher.
詹姆斯博士是个学者，也可以说是个不错的哲 学家。
联系: He isn’t much of a cook.
23. 【2011四川】There is ______ in his words. We should have a try.
A. something B. anything
C. nothing D. everything
考点5. everybody /something等人称代词替代问题
anyone/ anybody /somebody /everybody
1 指个体时，谓语动词用单数：
Has anyone a dictionary he can lend me?
Everyone in our class goes in for sports.
2 指“全部、无一例外”时，anyone/anybody在附加问句中，则其主语用复数代词表示此意：Anybody can enter for the race, can’t they?
Everyone in our class goes in for sports, don’t they?
3 在口语中，特别是对话中，为避免明确指出所指对象的性别。
Everybody was wearing their shorts.
I told everyone to run as fast as they can.
something, everything 谓语动词用单数 （包括在反意问句的陈述和疑问部分中）：
Everything has gone wrong today, hasn’t it ?





第5讲 反身代词


1.

反身代词指：myself, yourself, himself, herself, itself, ourselves, yourselves, themselves。
表示单数的反身代词以self结尾；表示复数的反身代词以selves结尾；
第一人称和第二人称前面用的是物主代词；第三人称前面用的是代词宾格。
反身代词有两种用法：反射，强调
精品-高中英语语法通霸-2.代词用法常考点分类专项总结归纳讲解与高考真题分类练习题及答案.doc
I. 反射
反身代词指代主语，与指代的名词或代词形成互指关系。反身代词和人称代词作宾语时具有不同的含义。如：
He saw himself in the mirror.
他在镜子里看见了他自己。（himself ,he 为同一人）
He saw him in the mirror.
他在镜子里看见了他。（him 显然指另外一人）
因此当宾语和主语指代同一人时，要用反身代词，不能用人称代词。
I could not dress (myself) up at that time.
那个时候我不能打扮我自己。
She seated herself by the window.
她拣了窗边的一个座位坐下来。
I am not myself today. 我今天不舒服。
She was beside herself with grief.
她悲伤过度，精神失常了。
Behave yourselves, children.孩子们，规矩点。
The girl fell off her bike and hurt herself.
女孩从自行车上摔下来，受了伤。
改错：
He had a deep voice, which set himself from others in our small town. 【2013新课标Ⅰ】
答案：himself改为him
II. 强调：常作同位语
I myself heard him say so yesterday.
我昨天亲自听他这么说的。
She did it herself. （=She herself did it. ）
她自己做的。
The story itself is not interesting.
故事本身并不令人感到有趣。

练习
2. 【2010上海】If our parents do everything for us children, we won’t learn to depend on _________.
A. themselves B. them
C. us D. ourselves
3. 【2006福建】—Who called me this morning when I was not in?
—A man calling ______ Robert.?
A. his B. himself C. his D. /
4. 【2007上海春】Treat _____ to a glass of wine to help you relax at the end of the day.
A. one B. oneself
C. you D. yourself
5. 【2008江西】Isn’t it amazing how the human body heals _____ after an injury?
A. himself B. him
C. itself D. it
6. 【2008湖南】 Our neighbors gave _____ a baby bird yesterday that hurt _____ when it fell from its nest.
A. us; it B. us; itself
C. ourselves; itself D. ourselves; it
7. 【2011安徽】Surprisingly, Susan’s beautiful hair reached below her knees and made _____ almost an overcoat for her.
A. them B. her
C. itself D. herself
8. 【2013上海】Those who smoke heavily should remind ________ of health, the bad smell and the feelings of other people.
A. theirs B. them
C. themselves D. oneself









第6讲 代词it的常考点




考点1. it作形式主语或宾语, 代指后面的不定式或动名词或句子
1. 【2010全国2】The doctor thought _____ would be good for you to have a holiday.
A. this B. that C. one D. it
2. 【2007全国II】_____ felt funny watching myself on TV.
A. One B. This C. It D. That
3. 【2012 陕西】No matter where he is, he makes _____ a rule to go for a walk before breakfast.
A. him B this C. that D. it
4. Why don’t you bring _____ to his attention that now students are bearing too heavy learning load?
A. it B. this C. that D. what
5. You may depend on _____ that he will turn up in time.
A. it B. me C. which D. them
6. Will you see to _____ that the luggage is brought back?
A. me B. yourself C. it D. them
7. 【2011山东】The two girls are so alike that strangers find ___ difficult to tell one from the other.
A. it B. them C. her D. that
8. — I don’t know whether I should go abroad or not, Mum.
— I leave _____ to your own judgment whether you should do it.
A. that B. it C. this D. what
考点2. 用于表达天气、环境、时间、距离、季节等
1 It’s half an hour’s walk from here to our school. (指距离)
2 It’s nice and warm here. （指天气、气候）
3 But it’s two o’clock now, and it’s time for us to go to school. （指时间）
9. They live on a busy main road. _____ must be very noisy.
A. There B. It C. That D. They
考点3. 不知性别,是婴儿常用it
10. Mary is expecting another baby and hopes _____ will be a boy.
A. he B. that C. it D. there
考点4. it 用以指身份不明的人
it用以指身份不明的人。若指身份明确的人，则不宜用it。试比较：
1 Mr. Smith is at the door. _____ wants to see you.
2 Someone is at the door. _____ must be Mr. Smith.
A. He B. It C. This D. That
答案：①A ②B
11. —Who’s that?
—____ Professor Li.
A. Its B. It’s C. He’s D. This’s
12. —Who knocked on the door?
—I’ve no idea. I just pretended nobody was at home, so I didn’t ask who _____ was.
A. he B. that C. she D. it
考点5. I like it when…
在通常情况下，like是及物动词，其后应有宾语（句中 it 即为其宾语）。句中的when从句不是宾语从句，而是时间状语从句，其中的 when 的意思是“当……的时候”。其实，也有的词典将I don’t like it when（if）… 作为一个句型来处理。
能这样用的动词不多，主要的有enjoy, like, dislike, love, hate, prefer, appreciate等表示喜好的动词。
She won’t like it if you arrive late.
她不喜欢你迟到。
He hates it when people use his bike.
他讨厌别人用他的自行车。
13. —Have you got used to your school life here?
—Yes, but I don’t like _____ when we have to do exercises on cold winter morning.
A. that B. it C. those D. this
14. I dislike _____ when others laugh at me in public or think poorly of me behind.
A. that B. those C. it D. them
15. I’d prefer _____ if I didn’t have to get up early on Sundays.
A. that B. such C. it D. which
16. 【1998全国】I hate _____ when people talk with their mouths full.
A. this B. that C. it D. you
17. 【2006山东】I’d appreciate _____ if you would like to teach me how to use the computer.?
A. that B. it C. this D. you
18. 【2004全国I】I like _____ in the autumn when the weather is clear and bright.
A. this B. that C. it D. one
19. —Do you like _____ here?
—Oh, yes. The air, the weather, the way of life. Everything is so nice.
A. this B. these C. that D. it
考点6. I can’t help it/ can help it/ can’t help doing/
can’t help but do
Can’t help doing= can’t help but do：无法控制、忍不住做某事、不能停止做某事
She talked too much; she couldn’t help it / herself.
He failed in the examination and couldn’t help feeling sad. 他考试没通过，不由得感到难过。
You can’t help but respect them. (答疑qq 329950885)你不能不尊敬他们。
Sue doesn’t always mean to be so rude but sometimes she just can’t help herself.
I always get angry with him. I just can’t help it.
can’t help“不能制止，不能控制”；那么can help就是“能制止，能控制住”。
【2006 全国I】If I can help _____, I don’t like working late into the night.
A. so B. that C. it D. them
本句的意思为“要是我能制止得住的话，我也不愿意工作到深夜”。又如：
I can’t help it if he doesn’t come.
如果他不来，我也没办法。
We can’t help it that things went badly.
没有办法，事情进展得不顺利。
20. 【2006 全国I】If I can help _____, I don’t like working late into the night.
A. so B. that C. it D. them
21. 【2005全国1】—Oh dear ! I’ve just broken a window.
—_____. It can’t be helped.
A. Never mind B. All right
C. That’s fine D. Not at all
22. 【2013新课标I】Try not to cough more than you can ___ since it may cause problems to your lungs.
A. check B. allow C. stop D. help
考点7. make it 的用法
1 表示事业获得成功
You will make it if you try.
你会成功的，如果你努力的话。
He’s never really made it as an actor.
他当演员从未有所成就。
2 表示某人做成某事
You needn’t worry; he will make it.
你不必担心，他会办成的。
I thought he would be too old to get to the top of the mountain, but he made it at last.
我原以为他年纪大爬不到山顶，但最后他还是爬上去了。
3 表示设法做到某事
I’ve been having violin lessons every two weeks, but I think I’ll make it every week from now on.
我一直是每两个星期上一次小提琴课，但是我想从现在起每个星期都上课。
4 表示及时抵达某地
We are too late; I don’t think we can make it.
我们太迟了，我想我们难以准时赶到了。
The train won’t leave for another ten minutes, so I think we can make it.
离开车还有10分钟，我想我们能赶得上。
5 表示约定时间
—Shall we make it next week?
—OK, let’s make it next week.
—下个星期可以吗？
—好的，咱们就定在下个星期吧。
Let’s make it at 8:30. Is that all right for you?
我们约在8点半吧，这对你合适吗?
6 表示病情好转
The doctor knew that the patient was unlikely to make it.医生知道那个病人没什么希望了。
23. 【2012全国Ⅱ】Sarah made _____ to the airport just in time to catch her plane this morning.
A. herself B. this C. that D. it
24. 【2013陕西】—Shall we go for a drink at one o’clock this afternoon?
— ______. Will two o’clock be OK?
A. Sure, it’s up to you
B. Sure, no problem
C. Sorry, I can’t make it
D. Sorry, I’m not available today



链接: it用于强调句型
25. —Who is making so much noise in the garden?
—_____ the children.（参看P. 175考点4）
A. It is B. They are
C. That is D. There are



写作专练: 使用好代词，写正确优美句子（P. 225)





答案：

代词
第1讲 人称代词
1. B 2. A 3. D 4. D
第2讲 指示代词
1. D 2. C 3. C 4. A 5. C
6. D 7. A 8. C
第3讲 不定代词(一)
1. D 2. C 3. B 4. C 5. B
6. C 7. C 8. A 9. B 10. A
11. A 12. A 13. C 14. B 15. B
16. A 17. C 18. D 19. C 20. B
21. B 22. C 23. A 24. C 25. B
26. A 27. A 28. B
第4讲 不定代词(二)
1. A 2. C 3. B 4. C 5. C
6. A 7. C 8. C 9. A 10. A
11. C 12. A 13. A 14. B 15. A
16. A 17. A 18. B 19. B 20. D
21. B 22. C 23. A
第5讲 反身代词
1. D 2. B 3. D 4. C 5. B
6. C 7. C
第6讲 代词it的常考点
1. D 2. C 3. D 4. A 5. A
6. C 7. A 8. B 9. B 10. C
11. B 12. D 13. B 14. C 15. C
16. C 17. B 18. C 19. D 20. C
21. A 22. D 23. D 24. C 25. A
































第3章 形容词和副词

形容词用来修饰、说明名词或不定代词，表示人或物的性质、特征和状态。而副词是用来修饰动词、形容词、其他副词或整个句子，有时也能修饰名词，表示时间、地点、方式、程度等。何时用形容词何时用副词是许多同学搞不清楚的地方。一些常见形容词、副词的区别也是高考的一个重点。


第1讲 形容词和副词的选用


考点1.

考点2. 根据所作的句子成分选用形容词和副词
修饰动词、形容词、副词或整个句子用副词，这时，副词作状语；作定语、表语和补语时一般用形容词。
可简单归结为：形作“定表补”；副修“副句形动”(可谐音记为“付诸行动”)，常做状语。
常见的使用形容词的情况：作表语、定语、补语。
He is a careful boy.（作定语，用形容词）
He is careful.（作表语，用形容词）
You must keep your eyes closed. （作宾语补足语，用形容词）。
常见的使用副词的情况：修饰动词、形容词、副词和整个句子。
He writes carefully. He walks slowly.
(认真地写，慢慢地走，修饰动词用副词)
This material is environmentally friendly.
（修饰形容词用副词）
He runs very slowly.
（修饰副词slowly, 因此very是副词）
Unfortunately, he lost all of his money.
（修饰整个句子用副词）
Ⅰ. 用括号内词的形容词或副词形式的适当形式填空, 并说明为什么用这种形式。
1. This math problem is _____ and I can work it out _____.(easy)
2. There was a _____ wind last night, it blew _____.(strong)
3. The boys have a _____ time, they’re playing _____.(happy)
4. The_____ girl sings very _____. (beautiful)
5. “I’ve missed it,” Robert said _____. (angry)
6. _____（surprising）, he returned safe and sound (安然无恙地) the next morning.
7. _____ (hope), he can get on well with all his classmates in the new school.
8. _____, he didn’t fail in the exam.(luck)
9. He was _____ ill and I was _____ sorry for that. (terrible)
10. It was _____ (extreme) cold that day and the meeting was _____ (especial) important.
11. He is an _____ singer and he sings _____ well. (incredible)
Ⅱ. 选择括号内的形容词或副词填空。
The hikers were walking (1.slow/slowly) up the mountain path. Suddenly, they saw a large creature above them. It looked very (2. strange/strangely), with a large head and thick black hair. The creature screamed (尖叫) （3. loud/loudly. ）It sounded (4.horrible /horribly), like the scream of a mad person. Then the creature ran (5.quick/quickly) behind a rock. When the hikers got there, they saw big footprints in the snow and some black hair on the rocks. The hair was dirty and smelled （6. terrible/terribly）. The hikers (7. careful /carefully) took photos. From that moment they started to feel (8.anxious/anxiously) and they slept (9.bad/badly) that night. When they got back home, they developed (冲洗) the photos. There was nothing there, only snow and rocks!
Ⅲ. 单项选择。
1. 【1991全国】These oranges taste _______.
A. good B. well
C. to be good D. to be well
2. ?【2006上海春】Some experts think that language learning is much _____ for children as their tongues are more flexible.?
A. easy B. easier
C. easily D. more easily
3. 【2009福建】It seems that living green is _____ easy and affordable. A small step makes a big difference.
A. exactly B. fortunately
C. surprisingly D. hardly
4. —What do you think of the plan????
—I feel _____ that we ought to give it up at once.?
A. strong B. stronger
C. strongly D. it strong
5. 【1993全国】She doesn’t speak _____ her friend, but her written work is excellent.
A. as well as B. so often as?
C. so much as D. as good as
6. 【2004上海】He speaks English well indeed, but of course not _____ a native speaker.
A. as fluent as B. more fluent than
C. so fluently as D. much fluently than
7. 【2006湖南】Although she did not know Boston well, she made her way _____ to the Home Circle Building. (答疑qq 329950885)
A. easy enough B. enough easy
C. easily enough D. enough easily
8. 【2007 上海春】Nowadays the roles of husband and wife are not as _____ defined as before, especially when both partners work and earn money for the family.
A. clear B. clearer
C. clearly D. more clearly
9. 【2007 浙江】Work gets done _____ when people do it together, and the rewards are higher too.
A. easily B. very easy
C. more easily D. easier
10. 【2005上海春】—What a nice fire you have in your fireplace!
—During the winter I like my house _____.
A. warmly and comfortably?
B. warm and comfortable
C. warm and comfortably?
D. warmly and comfortable
11. 【2007 上海春】Although the country has had political independence for over a century, _____ it needs the support of its neighbors.
A. naturally B. economically
C. especially D. luckily
12. _____, the thief didn’t take anything valuable but my notebook.???
A.?Strange it is B. To be strange? ?
C. Strangely enough D. It was strange
考点3. 形容词也作状语，但表示主语所处的状态
1. 【2013上海】The judges gave no hint of what they thought, so I left the room really ________.
A. to be worried B. to worry
C. having worried D. worried
2. The old hostess stood _____ for a moment when she saw a beggar appear before her suddenly.
A. surprising B. surprised
C. surprisedly D. to surprise
3. 【2008北京】 After the long journey, the three of them went back home, _____.
A. hungry and tiredly B. hungry and tired
C. hungrily and tiredly D. hungrily and tired
4. 【2009浙江】_____ and short of breath, Andy and Ruby were the first to reach the top of Mount Tai.
A. To be tried B. Tired
C. Tiring D. Being tired
考点4. 以-ly结尾的未必都是副词
下列单词以-ly结尾，但却是形容词而非副词：
lively, lonely, lovely, deadly, friendly, ugly, silly, likely, brotherly, timely等。
考点5. 下列几组词，词尾有无-ly都可作副词
一些副词有副词原形和以-ly结尾两种形式。大多数情况下，不以-ly结尾表“具体”，以-ly结尾表“抽象”。
1. ?close与closely
close意思是“近”; closely 意思是“仔细地，密切地”。如：
He is sitting close to me.
Watch him closely.
2. late 与lately
?late意思是“晚”；lately意思是“最近”。如：
?What have you been doing lately?
3. deep与deeply
deep意思是“深”，表示空间深度；deeply时常表示感情上的深度，“深深地”。如：
?He pushed the stick deep into the mud.
?Even Father was deeply moved by the film.
4. high与highly
high表示空间高度；highly表示程度，相当于much。如：
The plane was flying high.
I think highly of your opinion.
5. wide与widely
wide表示空间宽度；widely意思是“广泛地”,“在许多地方”。如：
He opened the door wide.
English is widely used in the world.
6. free与freely
free的意思是“免费的”；freely 的意思是“无限制地”。如：
You can eat free in my restaurant whenever you like.
You may speak freely; say what you like.
5. 【2002北京】It was raining heavily. Little Mary felt cold, so she stood ______ to her mother.
A. close B. closely
C. closed D. closing
6. Hold the book ______ please, for I can’t see the words in it clearly.
A. more closer B. more closely
C. closely D. closer
7. Although he was disabled when he was only ten years of age, yet he aimed ______, for which his classmates spoke ______ of him.
A. high; high B. highly; highly
C. highly; high D. high; highly




第2讲
第3讲 -ed形容词与-ing形容词




-ed形容词，通常说明人，意为“（某人）感到……”；-ing形容词通常说明事物，意为“（某事物）令人……”或“令人……的（事物）”。
?He has a frightened look on his face. 他脸上带有惊恐的神情。（他感到恐惧）
He has a frightening look on his face. 他脸上带着令人恐惧的神情。
excite 使人兴奋 excited 感到兴奋的 exciting 令人兴奋的
surprise 使吃惊 surprised 感到吃惊的 surprising令人吃惊的
amaze使惊奇 amazed 感到惊奇的 amazing令人惊奇的
embarrass使窘迫 embarrassed感到窘迫的 embarrassing令人窘迫的
frustrate使沮丧 frustrated 感到沮丧的 frustrating令人沮丧的
interest使感兴趣 interested 感到有兴趣的 interesting令人感兴趣的
thrill使兴奋 thrilled感到兴奋的 thrilling令人兴奋的
terrify使恐惧 terrified感到恐惧的 terrifying令人恐惧的
please使高兴 pleased 感到高兴的 pleasing令人高兴的
satisfy使满意 satisfied感到满意的 satisfying令人满意的
frighten使害怕 frightened 感到害怕的 frightening令人害怕的
tire使疲倦 tired 感到疲倦的 tiring 令人疲倦的
bore使厌烦 bored 感到厌烦的 boring令人厌烦的
relax使放松 relaxed 感到放松的 relaxing令人放松的
fascinate使神魂颠倒fascinated感到神魂颠倒的 fascinating令人神魂颠倒的
annoy使恼怒 annoyed感到恼怒的 annoying令人恼怒的
move使感动 moved 感到感动的 moving令人感动的
worry使忧虑 worried 感到忧虑的 worrying令人忧虑的
confuse使困惑 confused 感到困惑的 confusing令人困惑的
touch使感动 touched感到感动的 touching令人感动的
disappoint使失望 disappointed感到失望的 disappointing令人失望的
shock使震惊 shocked感到震惊的 shocking令人震惊的
puzzle使迷惑 puzzled感到迷惑的 puzzling令人迷惑的
练 习
Ⅰ. 用括号内所给动词的-ed形式或-ing形式填空。
1. The children were _____ after the trip. (tire)
2. The trip was _____. (tire)
3. The _____ children went to bed early after the trip. (tire)
4. The _____ trip lasted a whole day. (tire)
5. The trip made the children _____. (tire)
6. The bad weather made the trip _____. (tire)
7. Tom’s parents are _____ at his _____ results of the exams. (disappoint)
8. _____ and angry, he left the meeting-room. (disappoint)
9. It is _____ that he didn’t pass the examination.
(disappoint)
10. When hearing the _____ news that Michael Jackson passed away, they were _____ to look at each other. (surprise)
11. He was _____ about his _____ son. (worry)
12. I’m not _____ with his interpretation of this sentence. (satisfy)
13. He was _____ with the _____ person. (annoy)
14. A police car appeared on the road, the thief had a _____ look on his face. (frighten)
15. The situation here is _____ and we are _____. (encourage)
16. I find the shopping very _____. I get very _____ in supermarkets. (bore)
17. I am _____ in science. I think it’s very _____. (interest)
18. I don’t find basketball _____. I only get _____ when I watch football. (excite)
19. He said he was _____ (please) with the progress of economy, but I found some of what he said was _____ (worry).
Ⅱ. 单项选择。
1. From his _____ voice on the phone I know everything is going under way.
A. satisfactory B. satisfying
C. satisfied D. satisfaction
2. 【2002春】— I’m very _____ with my own cooking. It looks nice and smells delicious.
—Mm, it does have a _____ smell.
A. pleasant; pleased
B. pleased; pleased
C. pleasant; pleasant
D.?pleased; pleasant
3. 【2003北京春】Mr. Smith, _____ of the _____ speech, started to read a novel.
A. tired; boring B. tiring; bored
C. tired; bored D. tiring; boring
4. 【2004重庆】Laws that punish parents for their little children’s actions against the laws get parents _____.
A. worried B. to worried?
C. worrying D. worry
5. He had never spent a ______ day.
A. more worry B. most worrying
C. more worrying D. more worried
6. 【2006安徽】Tom sounds very much ______ in the job, but I’m not sure whether he can manage it.
A. interested B. interesting??
C. interestingly D. interestedly
7. How did you find your visit to the museum?
I thoroughly enjoyed it. It was _____ than I expected.
A. far more interesting B. even much interested
C. so more interesting D. a lot much interested
8. Poor boy! His ______ looks and ______ hands suggested he was very afraid.
A. frightful; trembling
B. frightened; trembling
C. frightening; trembled
D. frightened; trembly
9. What seemed most ______ to me was that no one thought of his own safety.
A. surprised B. surprise
C. surprising D. to surprise





第4讲 其他相关考点




考点1. 副词按意义分类
1 方式副词
suddenly突然地????rapidly迅速地 warmly热烈地 successfully成功地 quickly很快地???
2 地点、方向副词
here?这里?? ? there??那里 outside?在外边
away??远离??? straight径直地 upstairs上楼
3 时间副词
now??现在???? then??当时 soon?不久????
tomorrow在明天?? yesterday在昨天
4 频度副词（又称：频率副词）
always 总是???? usually 通常 frequently频繁地 often 经常 sometimes有时 seldom 很少
5 程度副词
very??非常??? quite?十分 too太????? pretty 相当 rather稍微 extremely极端地 almost几乎???

考点2. 静态形容词和动态形容词
静态形容词：描绘的是人或物在静态下表现出的特征，如tall, big, deep, ugly, beautiful等。大多数形容词都是静态的。
动态形容词：描绘的是人或物通过行为活动才能表现出来的特征。(答疑qq 329950885)如： adorable, calm, cheerful, generous, gentle, loyal, nice, noisy, playful, reasonable, rude, shy, slow等。
1 动态形容词可用于进行时，而静态形容词不可以。如：She is being nice to me.她现在对我很好。但不可说：She is being tall.
2 动态形容词可用于以动be词开头的祈使句，而静态形容词不可以。例如可以说：Be patient! Be careful!
不可以说：Be tall!
3 动态形容词可用于使役结构,而静态形容词不可以。例如可以说： I persuaded her to be generous.不可以说： I persuaded her to be pretty.
1. 【2011全国I】I wasn’t sure if he was really interested or if he ______ polite.
A. was just being B. will just be
C. had just been D. would just be
考点3. too, so, how, that, as ﹢形容词﹢a/an﹢名词
看下列几个短语：
a good boy so good a boy
a hot day too hot a day
a tall tree that tall a tree
a beautiful flower how beautiful a flower
a good gift as good a gift
可以看出：单个形容词修饰名词，冠词放在形容词的前面；如果形容词被so, too, that, how, as等词修饰时，(答疑qq 329950885)冠词则放在形容词后面。
要掌握下面的同义转换：
The boy is so good.= He is so good a boy.
What a good boy he is！=How good a boy he is!
=I have never seen that good a boy.
He is as good as his brother.
=He is as good a boy as his brother.
The boy is too short to be a basketball player.
=He is too short a boy to be a basketball player.
2. Alice was ______ girl to express herself.
A. a much too shy B. too much shy a
C. so shy a D. much too shy a
3. I’m afraid I’ll turn to Prof. Timlingson. It is ______.
A. too difficult a problem
B. a too difficult problem
C. so difficult problem
D. a so difficult problem
4. 【1992上海】 ______ box cannot be lifted by a boy of five.
A. So a heavy B. So heavy a
C. A such heavy D. Such heavy
5. 【2003北京】Our neighbor has ______ ours.
A. as a big house as B. as big a house as
C. the same big house as D. a house the same big as
6. 【2012四川】 I make $2,000 a week; 60 surely won’t make ______ difference to me.
A. that a big B. a that big
C. big a that D. that big a
7. It is generally believed that teaching is ______ it is a science.
A. an art much as B. much an art as
C. as an art much as D. as much an art as
8. 【1995全国】Can you believe that in ______ a rich country there should be ______ many poor people?
A. such; such B. such; so?
C. so; so D. so; such
9. 【1998上海】 It is ______ work of art that everyone wants to have a look at it.
A. so unusual B. such unusual?
C. such an unusual D. so an unusual
10. 【2009上海】The Great Wall is ______ tourist attraction that millions of people pour in every year.
A. so a well-known B. a so well-known
C. such well-known a D. such a well-known
考点4. 形容词顺序
几个并列的形容词作定语，其语序通常为：限定语（the, a, this）+数量词（two）+ 描绘性形容词(beautiful, good, strong) + size（大、小big）+ shape（形状round）+ age（年龄、时间new, young）+ color（颜色）+ origin（国籍、来源）+ material（材料）+ purpose（用途目的）+ 名词。如：
a heavy black Chinese steel umbrella;
the man’s first two interesting little red French oil paintings。
可以按这种方法记忆：限数描，形（大小形状）龄色，国材用。
可以谐音为: 献树苗，形龄色，我才用。（你向我献树苗，我要先看一下树苗的大小形状树龄和颜色，然后再决定我用还是不用。“形”，先“大小”后“形状”。）
也可以按下面的方法记：
限定 描述 大长高，形状 年龄与新老；
限数 描 （大小） 形 龄
颜色 国籍 出材料，用途 类别往后靠。
色 国 材 用
11. He likes going fishing. He usually uses a ______.??
A. bamboo long fishing pole
B. long bamboo fishing pole
C. pole long bamboo and fishing?? ?
D. bamboo fishing long pole
12. 【1995全国】—How was your recent visit to Qingdao?
—It was great. We visited some friends, and spent the ______ days at the seaside.
A. few last sunny B. last few sunny
C. last sunny few D. few sunny last
13. 【2013上海】It’s a ________ clock, made of brass and dating from the nineteenth century.
A. charming French small
B. French small charming
C. small French charming
D. charming small French
14. 【2004浙江】______ students are required to take part in the boat race.
A. Ten strong young Chinese
B. Ten Chinese strong young
C. Chinese ten young strong
D. Young strong ten Chinese
15. 【2004江苏】The ______ house smells as if it hasn’t been lived in for years.
A. little white wooden B. little wooden white
C. white wooden little D. wooden white little
16. 【2005北京】 This ______ girl is Lind’s cousin.
?A. pretty little Spanish B. Spanish little pretty?
?C. Spanish pretty little D. little pretty Spanish?
考点5. the加形容词表示一类人
（参看冠词部分P. 7考点3）
考点6. a three-year-old girl有连字符,名词不用复数
有连字符时，数词和形容词中间的名词用单数。
We’ll have a 30-day-long holiday.此时day不能用复数。
17. 【2010上海】 It took us quite a long time to get to the amusement park. It was ______ journey.
A. three hour B. a three-hours
C. a three-hour D. three hours?
18. Now he is ______ artist. I have known him since he was ______ one-year-old boy.
A. a; an B. a; a C. an; an D. an; a
19. Many students signed up for the ______ race in the sports meeting to be held next week.
A. 800-metre-long B. 800 metres long???
C. 800 metre length D. 800 metres length
考点7. “be of＋名词”表特征
I. be of＋importance/use等抽象名词
of后跟名词value, use, importance, help, interest, benefit, honor, fame, ability, nature, beauty等时，相当于名词所对应的形容词，(答疑qq 329950885)这类名词可用no, any, little, much, great等修饰。如：
The book is of great interest.
＝The book is very interesting.
The book is of no value.
＝The book is valueless.
I want to read something of interest.
＝I want to read something interesting.
II. be of＋不定冠词＋可数名词
也相当于形容词，表示具有某方面的品质。
And if poverty is less of a problem and people are better educated, there is a good chance that we will see less violence and fewer wars.
He is more of a scholar than a teacher.
III. be of+ adj. + 种类、颜色、年龄、形状、价格等
名词是size, style, price, age, shape, length, depth, color, height, quality等时，表示不同的人或物的共同特征，这类名词可用a, an, the same, different, good等修饰。
We are both of an age.
=We are both of the same age.我们俩同龄。
This one and that one are of a price.
=This one and that one are of the same price.
这样东西和那样东西的价格相同。
Coins may be of different shapes.
=Coins may be different in shape.
硬币有不同的形状。
Flowers are of many colors.
花的颜色很多。
20. Many people think that English soccer star David Beckham is ______ a pop star ______ a player.
A. mainly; than B. more of; than
C. either; or D. very much; not
21. You’ll find this map ______ great value in helping you to get around London.
A. in B. of C. to D. is
22. 【2011山东】I am afraid he’s more of a talker than a doer, which is ______ he never finishes anything.
A. that B. when C. where D. why
23. These two Christmas trees are of ___size, but the one they bought yesterday is maybe twice ___size of them.
A. the; the B. a; the
C. a; a D. the; a




写作专练1. 正确使用形容词和副词相关语法知识
（P. 226)





第5讲 几个常用形容词、副词的用法


1.

考点1. some与any的特殊用法
一般用法：
some, any可与单、复数可数名词及不可数名词连用。some一般用于肯定句，any多用于疑问、否定或条件句。
特殊用法：
1 any用于肯定句表示“任何”的意思。
Any child can do that.（定语）
You may take any of them.（宾语）
2 some用于单数可数名词前表示“某一”。
Smith went to some place in England.（定语）
3 在表示请求、邀请、征求意见等问句中，用some。
Would you like some bananas?（邀请）
Mum, could you give me some money?(请求)
4 some和any在句中还可作状语，作副词。some意为“大约”, 相当于“about”; 而any则表示程度，意为“稍，丝毫”, 可以修饰比较级。如：
There are some 300 workers on strike.
Do you feel any better today?
1. —Would you lend me ______ paper to write on?
—Sorry, I haven’t got ______ myself.
A. some; any B. any; any
C. any; some D. some; some
2. —When shall we meet again?
—Make it ______ day you like; It’s all the same to me.
A. one B. any C. another D. some
考点2. yes和no要根据实际情况来选择
yes和no容易用混的情况主要出现在：反义疑问句中，否定的一般疑问句和对陈述句的评论上。
技巧：把问题转化为含有(答疑qq 329950885) “有没有”“是不是”等的问题，再看是用yes还是用no。
在英语中，不管用肯定疑问句来问还是用否定疑问句来问，回答是一样的。
回答时，前后是一致的，即：只能说：Yes, it is. / No, it isn’t. 不会出现：Yes, it isn’t. / No, it is.这样的情况。
在反义疑问句中:
① —He isn’t from England, is he?
—______. He is from London.
A. No, he is B. No, he isn’t
C. Yes, he is D. Yes, he isn’t
② —He is from England, isn’t he?
— ______. He is from London.
A. No, he is B. No, he isn’t
C. Yes, he is D. Yes, he isn’t
分析：两个句子都可转换为“他是不是英国人？”。从后文“来自伦敦”可以看出“是英国人”。因此都选择C。
在否定的疑问句中：
①—Haven’t you been to Hong Kang?
—______. I went there last year.
A. Yes, I have B. No, I have
C. Yes, I haven’t D. No, I haven’t
②—Have you been to Hong Kong?
—______. I went there last year.
A. Yes, I have B. No, I have
C. Yes, I haven’t D. No, I haven’t
分析：首先排除矛盾选项B和C。两句都可转换为“你是不是去过香港？”。从后文中可以看出是“去过”。因此都要选肯定回答A。
在对陈述句的评论中：
①— I hear John doesn’t treat his wife well.
—______.He often beats her.
A. Yes B. No
②— I hear John doesn’t treat his wife well.
—______.He thinks she is the loveliest wife in the world.
A. Yes B. No
分析：在①中，句子可转换为“他对待妻子是好还是不好？”。从后文可以看出“不好”。因此选B。在②中，从后文可以看出“他对待妻子肯定很好”，因此选A。
3. —She wouldn’t drink her medicine last night, would she?
—______.
A. No, but I wish she wouldn’t??
B. No, but I wish she had
C. Yes, I wish she drank
D. Yes, I wish she could
4. —Don’t go there, it’s too dangerous！
— ______.
A. Yes, I won’t B. No, I weren’t
C. No, I can’t D. No, I won’t
5. 【2010四川】—I’m sorry. That wasn’t of much help.
—Oh, ______. As a matter of fact，it was most helpful.
A. sure it was B. it doesn’t matter
C. of course not D. thanks anyway
6. 【1997上海】— ______.
—Thank you, I certainly will.
A. Happy birthday to you
B. Let me help you with your math
C. Please remember me to your mum
D. Don’t forget to post the letter
7. Hasn’t your son graduated from college？
______ . To find a suitable job isn’t easy nowadays.
A. No, get down to it B. No, you hit the point C. Yes, face up to it D. Yes, that’s the problem
8. 【2006重庆】—Mr. Gordon asked me to remind you of the meeting this afternoon. Don’t you forget it!
—OK, I?______ .?
A. won’t? B. don’t　 C. will? D. do
考点3. no 的特殊用法
1 no修饰名词，相当于not a或not any。
作形容词修饰名词单数时，等于not… a; 修饰可数名词复数或不可数名词时等于not… any.
I have no pen. = I don’t have a pen.
I have no pens. = I don’t have any pens.
I have no money. = I don’t have any money.
可以看出：名词前没有a, any时，用no构成否定；名词前有a, any时，用not构成否定。
另外，no A or B = no A and no B。
I have no pen or paper.= I have no pen and no paper.
9. As I know, there is ______ car in this neighborhood.
A. no such B. no a
C. not such D. no such a
10. 【2010重庆】 Everything comes with ______ price; there is no such ______ thing as free lunch in the world.
A. a; a B. the; /
C. /; the D. a; /
2 no修饰比较级，译为“……不到哪儿去”。（参看P. 39考点4）
He is no taller than him.他比他高不到哪儿去。（他和他一样矮）
My English is no better than yours.
我的英语比你的好不到哪儿去。（一样差）
3 用于表示惊奇、怀疑或不信。
He left yesterday. No. 他昨天走了，不会吧！
4 no ＝not at all，意思是“完全不是，绝不是”。
His father is no teacher. 他的父亲绝不是教师。
It is no easy task. 这根本不是轻而易举的工作。
It is no joke. 这绝不是开玩笑的事。
5 在“no＋动名词”的省略句中，表示“禁止，不准”的意思。
No smoking！禁止吸烟！
No spitting on the floor！不要随地吐痰！
6 用于there is no+v-ing（动名词）的结构中。(参看P. 87考点4)。意为“丝毫不能；简直没有办法”。如：
There is no denying his honesty.
他的诚实是丝毫不可否认的。
There is no saying what may happen.
简直不知道今后会发生什么事。
7 用作名词，有单、复数之分，意为“不；否定”。
Once he had made up his mind to do something, he would not take “no” for an answer.
一旦他决定做某事，别人就是再说也没有用。
考点4. enough, else, present的位置
enough修饰形容词和副词时放在所修饰词之后, 修饰名词时有时放在所修饰词之前, 有时放在所修饰词之后。(答疑qq 329950885)else常放在不定代词和疑问词之后。present做“出席”讲是形容词, 要放在所修饰词之后。精品-高中英语语法通霸-3.形容词和副词常考点区别用法分类专项总结归纳讲解与高考真题练习题及答案.doc
11. 【2000全国】______ to take this adventure course will certainly learn a lot of useful skills.
A. Brave enough students
B. Enough brave students
C. Students brave enough
D. Students enough brave
12. 【2002北京】All the people ______ at the party were his supporters.
A. present B. thankful? C. interested?? D. important
13. 【1998全国】If I had ______, I’d visit Europe, stopping at the small interesting places.
A. a long enough holiday
B. an enough long holiday
C. a holiday enough long
D. a long holiday enough
14. 【2011浙江】Since people are fond of humor, it is as welcome in conversation as ______ else.
A. anything B. something
C. anywhere D. somewhere
考点5. more than的用法
I. “more than＋名词”表示“不仅仅是”。
Modern science is more than a large amount of information.
Jason is more than a lecturer; he is a writer, too.
We need more than material wealth to build our country.建设我们国家，不仅仅需要物质财富。
II. “more than＋形容词”等于“很”或“非常”的意思。
In doing scientific experiments, one must be more than careful with the instruments.
We will be more than glad /happy /willing to help you in any way we can.
She is more than pleased with her daughter’s performance.她对她女儿的表演很高兴。
She was more than satisfied with this result.
她对这个结果非常满意。
I am more than thankful to you.
我对你非常感激。
III. more than + (that)从句，其基本意义是“超过（over）”,
但可译成“简直不”,“远非”, “难以”，“完全不能”（其后通常连用情态动词 can）。
That is more than I can understand.
那非我所能懂的。
That is more than I can tell. 那事我实在不明白。
The heat there was more than he could stand.
那儿的炎热程度是他所不能忍受的。
15. 【2007 福建】—Do you need any help, Lucy?
—Yes. The job is ______ I could do myself.
A. less than B. more than
C. no more than D. not more than
16. —Do you like cats?
—Of course. They are ______ a kind of pet. They can do much good for their masters.
A. better than B. more than????????
C. no more than D. no better than
考点6. —Was he pleased to hear the news?
—______ pleased, even excited.
A. No more than B. More than
C. More D. More or less
考点7. anyway，anyhow不管怎样；尽管这样
Whatever else is happening(不管怎样); not considering other things (尽管这样)。
Of course I don’t mind taking you home—I’m going that way anyway.
当然我不介意带你回家，不管怎样我都会那样做的。
Her parents were opposed to her giving up her course, but she did it anyway.
她的父母亲反对她放弃她的课程，尽管这样，她还是放弃了。
17. 【2006湖北】I’m certain David’s told you his business troubles. ______, it’s no secret that he owes a lot of money to the bank.?
A. However B. Anyway
C. Therefore D. Though?
18. I might fail, but ______ I insist on doing it. I don’t mind.
A. however B. anyhow
C. yet D. meanwhile
19. 【2013江西】What a terrible experience ! ______, you’re safe now —that’s the main thing.
A. Anyway B. Besides
C. Otherwise D. Therefore
考点8. however不过，但是
20. 【2012天津】The dog may be a good companion for the old. ______, the need to take it for walks may be a disadvantage
A. Besides B. However
C. Therefore D. Instead
21. 【2012安徽】Queen Elizabeth Ⅱis often thought to be the richest woman in the world. ______, her personal wealth seems rather small.
A. Besides B. Otherwise
C. However D. Altogether
考点9. therefore (参看P. 186IV)
考点10. besides, what’s more而且
多用于列举时，是一种“加”的关系
22. 【2004安徽】—Do you think I should get a good guidebook?
—Yes, of course. ______, you also need a good camera and comfortable shoes.
A. What’s more B. In other words
C. By the way D. All in all
23. 【2005浙江】Maggie has been fortunate to find a job she loves and, ______, she gets well paid for it.
A. sooner or later B. what’s more
C. as a result D. more or less
24. 【2012湖南】Bicycling is good exercise; ______, it does not pollute the air.
A. nevertheless B. besides
C. otherwise D. therefore





第6讲 几组常考形容词、副词的区别


1.

考点1. late 和later
He is late. He is half an hour late.
Three minutes later, he arrived.
It will be rainy later on.
考点2. pleased, pleasing与pleasant
pleased的含义是“感到满意，高兴”，后常跟介词at, with。如：
I’m pleased to see you here.在这儿见到你很高兴。
She’s pleased with our programme.
她对我们的节目很满意。
pleasing表示“令人欣喜的”，相当于“giving pleasure”。如：
My sister’s progress in dancing is pleasing.
我姐姐在舞蹈方面的进步令人高兴。
The baby has a pleasing voice.
这个婴儿的声音很悦耳。
pleasant表示“快乐的，愉快的”。如：
The girl has a pleasant childhood.
这个女孩有一个快乐的童年。
To have a pleasant holiday is my favorite.
过一个愉快的假期是我最喜欢的。
考点3. living, alive与live
living作定语时，既可置于所修饰的名词之前，也可置于所修饰的名词之后，译为“活着的,当代的”。在句中充当定语及表语。如：
He is the greatest living writer in America.
他是当今美国最伟大的作家。
Not all living things live on sunlight.
并非所有的生物都依赖阳光生存。
My grandparents are still living.
我的祖父母仍然健在。
alive译为“活着的”，可以在句中作表语及定语。作定语时，(答疑qq 329950885)位于它所修饰的名词之后。如：
He may be the busiest person alive.
他可能是世上最忙的人了。
Is that sheep dead or alive?
那头羊是死了还是活着？
alive还有“活泼的，活动的，有生机的”之意。如：
You seem very much alive today.
你今天看起来很活跃。
live表示“活着的”，做“现场直播”讲时可以用作形容词、副词，在句子中可以作定语、表语。
Have you seen a live whale? 你见过活的鲸鱼吗？
The programme is live. /The programme is broadcast live. 这个节目是现场直播的。
1. —What a pity! I’ve not got a ticket for the football match.
—Don’t worry. It’ll be broadcast ______.
A. live B. lively C. alive D. living
考点4. big与large
big用得比较广泛，可以与large换用，另外还可以表示“伟大”、“巨大”、“重要”之意。large着重指“体积，容积”之大。如：
There is a large garden in our town.
我们镇上有一个大花园。
Is there a big tree in front of your house?
你的房子前有一棵大树吗？
It’s said that he is a big man.据说他是一个大人物。
考点5. worth, worthy与worthwhile
worth意为“值得的”，后接v-ing形式，构成“be worth doing”结构，也可接表示价格的名词及钱数。worthy意为“值得的”，后接“of+名词（或being+过去分词）”，构成“be worthy of+名词（或being done）”结构或“be worthy to be done”结构。如：
The book is well worth reading.
这本书很值得一读。
This coat is worth one hundred yuan.
这件上衣价值一百元。
This problem is worthy of being discussed.
这个问题值得讨论。
The land is worthy to be used.
这块地值得开发。
worthwhile意为“付出时间、金钱或努力是值得的”。可以作表语、定语、补语；it作形式主语时，后面真正主语可以用不定式也以可用动名词。如：
She considers teaching a worthwhile career.
If you need him on this project, you’ve got to make it financially worthwhile for him
It?is?worthwhile?buying?the?dictionary.?
It?is?worthwhile?to?discuss?the?plan?again.
worthwhile (答疑qq 329950885)也可分开写，此时，中间也可加上物主代词。如：
I’d?think?it?worth?while?to?go.?我认为值得去。
Would?you?like?to?do?some?gardening?for?me??I’ll make it worth your while.
2. 【济南统考】 Oh, boy, why are you killing your time this way??Can’t you find something ______ doing at all?
A. useful B. valuable C. worth D. good
考点6. ago与before
ago表示以现在为起点的“以前”；before指以过去或将来的某时刻为起点的“以前”。泛指“以前”用before而不用ago。
He came here three days ago.
He said he had come three days before.
考点7. too, also与either
too和also用于肯定句、疑问句，too多用于口语，also多用于书面语；either用于否定句。too常用在句末，also常用在句中。
3. 【1983全国】—I haven’t been to Guilin yet.
—I haven’t been there, ______.
A. too B. also C. either D. neither
4. 【2013福建】A society cannot be successful if it throws tradition away, but it cannot be successful ______if we do something to stop progress.
A. either B. neither C. too D. also
考点8. good与well
good是形容词。well一般用作副词，作形容词时，只能在系动词后作表语，表示“身体状况好”。
5. 【1993全国】—Mum, I think I’m ______ to get back to school.
—Not really, my dear. You’d better stay at home for another day or two. ?
A. so well B. so good
C. well enough D. good enough
考点9. real与true
形容词表“真的”。real强调真实存在的而不是幻想的，在句中常作定语；true指与事实标准和实际情况相符合，在句中作表语或定语。
考点10. hard与difficult
均表“困难”，但hard通常指体力上困难，difficult则指智力或技能上的困难，困难程度大于hard。它们都可作定语或表语。
The exam is difficult. It’s hard work.
考点11. likely与possible, probable
likely 的主语可以是it也可以是名词或其他代词，而possible和probable只能用it作主语。
6. This strange grass never seen before seems ______ to be a new plant.
A. likely B. possibly
C. probably D. particularly
7. The early train is ______ to leave at five in the morning.
A. possible B. due C. probable D. sure
8. 【2010陕西】Studies show that people are more ______ to suffer from back problems if they always sit before computer screens for long hours.
A. likely B. possible C. probable D. sure
考点12. most 与mostly
most作形容词或代词，如：most students, most of us。mostly为副词，表示大部分情况下，或成分中的大部分。
9. He enjoys a cup of coffee sometimes, but ______ he drinks tea.
A. most B. almost
C. nearly D. mostly
10. Football fans are ______ young people between the ages of fifteen and twenty.
A. most B. almost
C. mostly D. at most
11. She smiled to the people around but ______ look straight ahead, getting hold of her husband’s hand.
A. most B. almost
C. mostly D. nearly
12. The winners are ______ children brought up in the country.???
A. almost? B. mostly
C. most D. nearly
考点13. little, a little, few, a few
little, a little修饰不可数名词，few和a few修饰可数名词。要注意：
1 little, few表示否定，a little, a few表示肯定；表明的是说话者的态度。
如：你口袋里有10元钱，别人想问你借钱：
Could you lend me some money?
愿意借时，你可以说：
I have a little. I can lend you some.
不愿意借时，你可以说：
I have little money with me.
2 only后只能跟a little和a few;
only a little＝little; only a few＝few。
3 the first/last/next 后只能跟few，不能跟a few。我们可以说the next few days，但不能说the next a few days。
4 little的比较级是less，最高级是least；
few的比较级是fewer，最高级是fewest。
13. 【1989全国】This year they have produced ______ grain ______ they did last year.
A. as less; as B. as few; as
C. less; than D. fewer; than
14. 【2006全国2】I used to earn ______ than a pound a week when I first started work.
A. a little? B. a few C. fewer D. less?
15. 【2006辽宁】I hear ______ boys in your school like playing football in their spare time, though others prefer basketball.?
A. quite a lot B. quite a few
C. quite a bit D. quite a little?
16. 【2007 北京】He has made a lot of films, but ______ good ones.
A. any B. some C. few D. many
17. 【2011上海】When Mom looked back on the early days of their marriage, she wondered how they had managed with ______ money.
A. so few B. such few
C. so little D. such little
18. 【2013江西】There are a small number of people involved, possibly ______ twenty.
A. as few as B. as little as
C. as many as D. as much as





第7讲 几组常考形容词、副词词组的区别




考点1. 修饰可数名词、不可数名词、既可修饰可数又可修饰不可数名词的短语（参看P. 171考点2）
考点2. many more + 名词，much more + 名词，与another
We need many more chairs. 我们还需要许多椅子。
We need three more chairs. 我们还需要三张椅子。
We need a few more chairs. 我们还需要几张椅子。
We need some more meat. 我们还需要一些肉。
We need much more meat. 我们还需要很多肉。
This book is more interesting than that one.
这本书比那本书有趣。
This book is much more interesting than that one.
这本书比那本有趣得多。
前五个句子中的more和后两个句子中的more有什么不同？
（前五句中的more后面是名词，不是构成形容词的比较级。而后两句中的more后面是多音节形容词，是构成比较级。）
如果把前五句中的more去掉后就构成了many /three /a few chairs 和 some /much meat。
因此我们可以看出，more 在这里是形容词，用在名词和它的数量修饰语中间，表示在原来基础上“还，额外”。因此，在这种情况下more前用many, a few还是用much, a little取决于后面的名词是可数还是不可数。
此时可以与another互换用。如：
We have forty chairs now, but we still need five more chairs.
We have forty chairs now, but we still need another five chairs.
1. Some fish are dead in this lake and ______ more are sick.
A. much B. many C. a little D. a bit
2. 【2006全国3】—Did you take enough money with you??
—No, I needed _______ I thought I would.?
A. not so much as B. as much as????
C. much more than D. much less than??
3. 【2007 安徽】The school’ s music group will be giving a big show tomorrow night and two ______ on the weekend.
A. more B. other C. else D. another
4. 【2000全国】If you want to change for a double room you’ll have to pay ______ $ 15.
A. another B. other
C. more D. each
5. 【2012北京】Many people have donated that type of blood; however, the blood bank needs ______.
A. some B. less C. much D. more
考点3. as many as, as much as; as far as, as long as
用many还是用much关键是看所描述名词本身的性质而不是量词的单复数。
1 as much as + 不可数名词数量。
Each stone weighs as much as fifteen tons.
She could earn as much as ten dollars a week.
He weighs as much as 100kg.
2 as many as + 可数名词数量,“多达”。
I have as many as sixteen reference books.
As many as 100 people were killed in the air crash.
（链接：so little /few / many/ much参看P. 124考点1）
6. Sorry I haven’t been able to do ______ I should.
A. as many as B. as much as
C. as far as D. more than
7. ______ 1, 000 people were killed in the battle.
A. As much as B. As many as
C. As long as D. As far as
8. We need ______ $10,000 now.
A. as much as B. as many as
C. as long as D. as far as
9. In the summer months the difference in temperature between London and the north can be ______ nine degrees.
A. as much as B. as many as
C. as long as D. as far as
10. I had invited 50 guests to the party, but actually twice ______ came.
A. more than B. as many
C. as much D. less than
11. 【2008浙江】 I like this jacket better than that one, but it costs almost three times ______.
A. as much B. as many
C. so much D. so many
此类词组还有：
as long as＋数字＋名词 (长达……)；
as wide as＋数字＋名词 (宽达……)；
as high as＋数字＋名词 (高达……)；
as early as＋数字＋名词 (早在……)；
as late as＋数字＋名词 (迟在……)等。
I have been learning English (for) as long as 15 years.
He came home as late as two in the morning.
I saw your brother as late as last week.
The river is as wide as 100 meters.
I mailed the letter as early as Friday.
12. 【2010上海】In ancient times, people rarely travelled long distances and most farmers only travelled ______ the local market.
A. longer than B. more than
C. as much as D. as far as
13. 【2003上海】After supper she would sit down by the fire, sometimes for ______ an hour, thinking of her young and happy days.
A. as long as B. as soon as
C. as much as D. as many as
14. 【2003上海】—How far apart do they live? —______ I know, they live in the same neighborhood.
A. As long as B. As far as
C. As well as D. As often as
15. 【2004安徽春】______ I can see, there is only one possible way to keep away from the danger. ?
A. As long as B. As far as
C. Just as D. Even if
16. 【2005安徽】John is the tallest boy in the class, ______ according to himself.
A. five foot eight as tall as
B. as tall as five foot eight
C. as five foot eight tall as
D. as tall five foot eight as
17. 【2005湖南】The more I think about him, the more reasons I find for loving him ______ I did.
A. as much as B. as long as
C. as soon as D. as far as??
18. 【2006上海】A typhoon swept across the area with heavy rains and winds ______ strong as 113 miles per hour.
A. too B. very C. so D. as
考点4. no more than与no less than， not more than
1 no more than =only“不超过，只有，仅仅，只不过”, 暗含有“少”的意思，有主观意味。
There are no more than a hundred people in the hall. 大厅里只有100人。
2 not more than=at the most“不超过，至多”，只是客观描述。如：
There are not more than a hundred people in the hall. 大厅里不超过100人。
3 no less than“多达，不少于”, 暗含有“多”的意思， 有主观意味。
He made no less than￡500.
他赚了多达五百英镑的钱。
He walks no less than five miles to school.
他上学至少要走五英里。
19. I’m glad to say that he’s already finished _____ 50% of the book in these three days.
A. no less than B. no more than? ?
C. not more than D. much less than
考点5. before long与long before
before long是副词短语，意为“不久”, 近义于soon。
long before用法有两种情况：
① before引导时间状语从句，表示“在……之前”, 而long修饰(答疑qq 329950885)这个时间状语从句， 表示“在这之前很久就……”。如：
He had left here before I came.
在我来之前他就走了。
He had left here long before I came.
在我来之前很早他就走了。
② long before是一个副词短语，意为“很久以前”。
She said she had seen the film long before.
她说她很久以前就看过这部电影。

20. I had worked here ______ you came here. But I shall leave for England ______.
A. before long; before long
B. before long; long before
C. long before; before long
D. long before; long before
21. I had been to Beijing long ______ you visited it.
A. before B. till C. after D. when
22. He will pass two milestones ______, that is, he will receive his master’s degree and find a challenging job.
A. long ago B. not long ago
C. before long D. long before
考点6. too much 与much too
这两个词组重心都在第二个词上。much too意为“太”，修饰形容词和副词，用法相当于“too”；而 too much在用法上相当于“much”，修饰不可数名词。
23. 【1995上海】It was ______ late to catch a bus after the party, therefore we called a taxi.
A. too very B. much too
C. too much D. far
24. 【2003全国】Allen had to call a taxi because the box was ______ to carry all the way home.
A. much too heavy B. too much heavy
C. heavy too much D. too heavy much
25. 【2009全国II】?It’s high time you had your hair cut; it’s getting ______.
A. too much long B. much too long
C. long too much D. too long much
考点7. not a little, not a bit
not a little, 非常，相当于much；
not a bit, 一点也不。
26. His voice was quite ordinary, and not ______ angry.
A. a little B. very much
C. a bit D. plenty of
27. 【2011江西】—The film is, I have to say, not a bit interesting.
—Why? It’s ______ than the films I have ever seen.
A. far more interesting B. much less interesting
C. no more interesting D. any less interesting




写作专练2. 正确使用一些常用的形容词、副词或词组（P. 226)



第8讲 近几年高考题选（常考形容词、副词）


考点1.

考点2. 2006年以前
1. The new research team was led by the ______ engineer.
A. main B. major C. chief D. primary
2. — Why did she spend so much time searching shop after shop for a blouse?
— Oh, she was very ______ about her clothes.
A. special B. particular
C. especial D. unusual
3. It’s very ______ to let the old have seats on the bus.
A. thoughtful B. useful
C. careful D. funny
4. She was robbed of her handbag with the ______ sum of $5,000 in it.
A. extraordinary B. important
C. considerable D. valuable
5. —Haven’t they apologized to you yet?
—No explanation was offered, ______ an apology!
A. still less B. neither
C. not D. or rather
6. —Dr. White has got plenty of information about UFO. He’s promised to offer it to me.
—I have as much. Would you like to have mine ______?
A. as well B. as possible
C. so far D. if so
7. Li Ping is the ______ man I want to see.
A. last B. laster C. lastest D. latter
8. The patient is supposed to go to the hospital for ______ checks.
A. common B. normal
C. regular D. usual
9. Nuclear science should be developed to benefit the people ______ harm them.
A. more than B. rather than
C. other than D. better than
10. A ______ man came to see you this morning. But I don’t know him.
A. sure B. surely
C. certainly D. certain
11. The Chinese Educational Department suggests teachers should receive ______ education to catch up with the ______ development.
A. farther; late B. farther; later
C. further; lately D. further; latest
12. He was the ______ at that moment.?
A. only awake person B. only person awake?
C. awake only person D. person only awake
13. What he has done is far from ______.
A. satisfactory B. satisfied
C. satisfaction D. satisfy
14. 【2001北京春】I am surprised that you should have been fooled by such a（an）______ trick.
A. ordinary B. easy
C. smart D. simple
15. 【2004天津】Mr. Smith used to smoke ______ but he has given it up.
A. seriously B. heavily
C. badly D. hardly
16. 【2004上海春】 The elderly need special care in winter, as they are ______ to the sudden change of weather
A. sensitive B. sensible
C. flexible D. positive
17. 【2004广西】When we plan our vacation, mother often offers ______ suggestions.
A. careful B. practical
C. effective D. acceptable
18. 【2005福建】―Why didn’t you buy the camera you had longed for?
―I had planned to, but I was ￡50 ______. ?
A. fewer B. less
C. cheap D. short
19. 【2005上海】There was such long queue for coffee at the interval that we ______ gave up.
A. eventually B. unfortunately?
C. generously D. purposefully
20. 【2005浙江】My mother always gets a bit ______ if we don’t arrive when we say we will.
A. anxious B. ashamed
C. weak D. patient
21. 【2006上海春】Small cars are ______ of fuel, so they have more appeal for consumers.?
A. free B. short
C. typical D. economical
22. 【2006江苏】—Are you going to have a holiday this year?
—I’d love to. I can’t wait to leave this place ______.
?A. off B. out C. behind D. over
23. 【2006浙江】Letterboxes are much more ______ in the UK than in the US, where most people have a mailbox instead.
A. common B. normal
C. ordinary D. usual
24. 【2006江西】Attention, coffee lovers! We have for you, the best coffee machine ______ invented.
A. ever B. already C. even D. now
考点3. 2007至2009
1. 【2007上海】John was dismissed last week because of his ______ attitude towards his job.
A. informal B. casual
C. determined D. earnest
2. 【2007湖北】He began to take political science ______ only when he left school.
A. strictly B. truly
C. carefully D. seriously
3. 【2007 湖北】This magazine is very ______ with young people, who like its content and style.
A. familiar B. popular
C. similar D. particular
4. 【2007 湖南】It’s hard for him playing against me. I’ve got nothing to play for, but for him, he needs to win so ______.
A. far B. well C. little D. badly
5. 【2007 天津】A new ______ bus service to Tianjin Airport started to operate two months ago.
A. normal B. usual
C. regular D. common
6. 【2007 天津】The final score of the basketball match was 93—94. We were only ______ beaten.
A. nearly B. slightly
C. narrowly D. lightly
7. 【2008江西 】Jack is late again. It is ___ of him to keep others waiting.
A. normal B. ordinary
C. common D. typical
8. 【2008山东 】Would it be ______ for you to pick me up at four o’clock and take me to the airport?
A. free B. vacant
C. handy D. convenient
9. 【2009四川】Ladies and gentlemen, please remain ______ until the plane has come to a complete stop.
A. seated B. seating
C. to seat D. seat
10. 【2009天津】The art show was ______ being a failure; it was a great success.
A. far from B. along with
C. next to D. regardless of
11. 【2009辽宁】Usually John would be late for meetings. But this time, ______ to my surprise, he arrived on time.
A. little B. much C. ever D. even
12. 【2009浙江】The incomes of skilled workers went up. ______, unskilled workers saw their earnings fall.
A. Moreover B. Therefore
C. Meanwhile D. Otherwise
13. 【2009浙江】John is very ______—if he promises to do something he’ll do it .
A. independent B confident
C. reliable D. flexible
14. 【2009浙江】In the good care of the nurses, the boy is ______ recovering from his heart operation.
A. quietly B. actually
C. practically D. gradually
15. 【2009湖北】As there is less and less coal and oil, scientists are exploring new ways of making use of ______ energy, such as sunlight, wind and water for power and fuel.
A. primary B. alternative
C. instant D. unique
16. 【2009湖北】The questionnaire takes ______ ten to fifteen minutes to complete and can be used along with the assessment interview.
A. mainly B. punctually
C. approximately D. precisely
17. 【2009全国II】I’m sure that your letter will get ______ attention. They know you’re waiting for the reply.
A. continued B. immediate
C. careful D. general
18. 【2009江苏】This special school accepts all disabled students, ______ educational level and background.
A. according to B. regardless of
C. in addition to D. in terms of
19. 【2009天津】It was a nice house, but ______ too small for a family of live.
A. rarely B. fairly
C. rather D. pretty
20. 【2009天津】I’m not surprised that he became a writer. Even as a child he had a ______ imagination. A. clear B. cautious C. funny D. vivid
考点4. 2010至2013
1. 【2010福建】Drunk driving, which was once a ______ occurrence, is now under control.
A. general B. frequent
C. normal D. particular
2. 【2010福建】—Volunteering is becoming ______ popular in China.
—Yeah, people are now aware that helping others is helping themselves.
A. naturally B. successfully
C. splendidly D. increasingly
3. 【2010湖北】In this lecture, I can only give you a purely ______ view of how we can live life to the full and make some suggestions about the future.
A. private B. personal
C. unique D. different
4. 【2010湖北】Mistakes don’t just happen; they occur for a reason. Find out the reason, and then making the mistake become ______.
A. favorable B. precious
C. essential D. worthwhile
5. 【2010湖北】If I find someone who looks like the suspect, my ______ reaction will be to tell the police.
A. physical B. immediate
C. sensitive D. sudden
6. 【2010湖北】I wasn’t blaming anyone; I ______ said errors like this could be avoided.
A. merely B. mostly
C. rarely D. nearly
7. 【2010山东】Mothers holding jobs outside the home should have ______ schedules to make it easier to care for their children.
A. heavy B. smooth
C. flexible D. complex
8. 【2010浙江】I have been convinced that the print media are usually more ______ and more reliable than television.
A. accurate B. ridiculous
C. urgent D. shallow
9. 【2011湖北】An unhappy childhood may have some negative effects on a person’s character; however, they are not always ______.
A. practical B. avoidable
C. permanent D. beneficial
10. 【2011江苏】In that school, English is compulsory for all students, but French and Russian are ______.
A. special B. regional
C. optional D. original
11. 【2011浙江】I’ve been writing this report ______ for the last two weeks, but it has to be handed in tomorrow.
A. finally B. immediately
C. occasionally D. certainly
12. 【2011浙江】My schedule is very ______ right now, but I’ll try to fit you in.
A. tight B. short
C. regular D. flexible
13. 【2011浙江】 The professor could tell by the ______ look in Maria’s eyes that she didn’t understand a single word of his lecture.
A. cold B. blank
C. innocent D. fresh
14. 【2011福建】Nowadays, there is a ______ increase in children’s creativity, for they are greatly encouraged to develop their talents.
A. sharp B. slight
C. natural D. modest
15. 【2012辽宁】We used to see each other ______, but I haven’t heard from him since last year.
A. especially B. regularly
C. particularly D. approximately

16. 【2012福建】Anyone, whether he is an official or a bus driver, should be ______ respected.
A. especially B. equally
C. naturally D. normally
17. 【2012福建】—Can you lend me the book Gone with the Wind?
— Sorry. I returned it to the library just now. Maybe it is still ______.
A. available B. affordable
C. acceptable D. valuable
18. 【2012山东】Be ______—you can’t expect me to finish all this work in so little time.
A. reasonable B. confident
C. creative D. grateful
19. 【2012浙江】The research lacks ______ evidence , and therefore , its conclusions are doubtful.
A. solid B. fierce
C. severe D. potential
20. 【2013福建】The Forbidden City attracts a ______stream of visitors every day, especially during national holidays.
A. constant B. main
C. powerful D. shallow
21. 【2013福建】Those poor and needy teenagers were excited to find a shop at the corner where they could buy ______ priced bikes.
A. competitively B. recently
C. reasonably D. affordably
22. 【2013辽宁】Everything seemed to be going ______ for the first two days after I moved to New York.
A. vividly B. generally
C. frequently D. smoothly
23. 【2013浙江】Mary worked here as a ______secretary and ended up getting a full-time job with the company.
A. pessimistic B. temporary
C. previous D. cautious
24. 【2013浙江】If we leave right away, ______ we will arrive on time.
A. hopefully B. curiously
C. occasionally D. gradually
25. 【2013浙江】If what your friend comes up with surprises you, don’t reject it immediately. ______, imagine that it is true.
A. Thus B. Besides
C. Rather D. Otherwise




答案：

第3章 形容词和副词
第1讲 形容词和副词的选用
Ⅰ.1. easy, easily。前面作表语用形容词，后面修饰动词work out，用副词。
2. strong, strongly。前面作定语用形容词，后面修饰动词blew，用副词。
3. happy, happily。(答疑qq 329950885)前面作time的定语用形容词，后面修饰动词play，用副词。
4. beautiful, beautifully。前面girl的定语用形容词，后面修饰动词sings，用副词。
5. angrily。修饰动词said用副词。
6. Surprisingly。修饰整个句子，指他安然无恙地到家这个事令人吃惊。
7. Hopefully。修饰整个句子，指“但愿，希望，可能这样”。
8. Luckily。修饰整个句子，指他通过这次考试很幸运。
9. terribly, terribly。修饰形容词ill和sorry用副词。
10. extremely, especially。修饰形容词cold和important用副词。
11. incredible，incredibly。前面作定语用形容词，后面修饰副词well用副词。
Ⅱ. 1. slowly 2. strange 3. loudly 4.horrible
5. quickly 6. terrible 7. carefully 8.anxious
9. badly
Ⅲ. 1. A 2. B 3. C 4. C 5. A
6. C 7. C 8. C 9. C 10. B
11. B 12. C
考点2和考点3
1. D 2. B 3. B 4. B 5. A
6. D 7. D
第2讲 -ed形容词与-ing形容词
Ⅰ. 1. tired 2. tiring 3. tired 4.tiring
5. tired 6.tiring 7.disappointed; disappointing
8. disappointed 9. disappointing
10. surprising; surprised 11. worried; worrying
12.satisfied 13. annoyed; annoying
14. frightened 15. encouraging; encouraged
16.boring; bored 17. interested, interesting
18. exciting; excited 19. pleased; worrying
Ⅱ. 1. C 2. D 3. A 4. A 5. C
6. A 7. A 8. B 9. C
第3讲 其他相关考点
1. A 2. D 3. A 4. B 5. B
6. D 7. D 8. B 9. C 10. D
11. B 12. B 13. D 14. A 15. A
16. A 17. C 18. D 19. A 20. B
21. B 22. D 23. B
第4讲 几个常用形容词、副词的用法
1. A 2. B 3. B 4. D 5. A
6. C 7. D 8. A 9. A 10. D
11. C 12. A 13. A 14. C 15. B
16. B 17. B 18. B 19. B 20. A
21. B 22. C 23. A 24. B 25. B
第5讲 几组常考形容词、副词的区别
1. A 2. C 3. C 4. A 5. C
6. A 7. B 8. A 9. D 10. C
11. C 12. B 13. C 14. D 15. B
16. C 17. C 18. A
第6讲 几组常考形容词、副词词组的区别
1. B 2. C 3. A 4. A 5. D
6. B 7. B 8. A 9. A 10. B
11. A 12. D 13. A 14. B 15. B
16. B 17. A 18. D 19. A 20. C
21. A 22. C 23. B 24. A 25. B
26. C 27. A
第7讲 近几年高考题选
2006年以前
1. C 2. B 3. A 4. C 5. A
6. A 7. A 8. C 9. B 10. D
11. D 12. B 13. A 14. D 15. B
16. A 17. B 18. D 19. A 20. A
21. D 22. C 23. A 24. A
2007至2009
1. B 2. D 3. B 4. D 5. C
6. C 7. D 8. D 9. A 10. A
11. B 12. C 13. C 14. D 15. B
16. C 17. B 18. B 19. C 20. D
2010至2013
1. B 2. D 3. B 4. D 5. B
6. A 7. C 8. A 9. C 10. C
11. C 12. A 13. B 14. A 15. B
16. B 17. A 18. A 19. A 20. A
21. D 22 D 23 B 24 A 25 C





















第4章 形容词和副词的比较等级


第1讲 关于than和as




考点1. as…as与(not) as (so)…as
1 在as…as句型中，第一个as是副词，用在形容词和副词的原级前，常译为“同样”。后面的as是连词。
He is tall.他高。
He is as tall. 他同样高。（as修饰tall,“同样”，为副词）
He is as tall as his brother is（tall）. 与他弟弟一样, 他是同样地高。(后面的as为连词，同……一样。)
2 只有在否定句中，第一个as才可换为so。
改错：He is so tall as his brother.
答案：so改为as
1. 【1994全国】John plays football _____, if not better than, David.
A. as well? B. as well as??C. so well??D. so well as
2. —Did you enjoy the movie last night????
—Yes, I didn’t expect it _____ wonderful.??
A. more? B. as C. most D. much
考点2. 在比较状语从句中，主句和从句的句式结构一般是相同的
与as…as句式中后一个as一样，than也是连词。as和than这两个连词后面的从句的结构与前面的句子结构相同，相同部分可以省略。
3. —What do you think of the plan?
—It’s easier said than ______.
A. carried out B. carrying out
C. carry out D. to carry out
4. To answer correctly is more important than ______.
A. that you finish quickly
B. finishing quickly
C. to finish quickly
D. finish quickly
考点3. 谓语的替代（参看P. 188考点2）
在as和than引导的比较状语从句中，由于句式同前面主句相同，为避免重复，常把主句中出现而从句中又出现的动词用do的适当形式来代替。如：
John speaks German as fluently as Mary does.
5. John gives me more help than ______.
A. Tom is B. Tom has
C. Tom does D. Tom gives
6. I picked more apples than you ______ yesterday.
A. picked B. do
C. did D. had
7. 【2007重庆】As I know, he spends at least as much time playing as he ______.
A. writes B. does writing
C. is writing D. does write






第2讲 比较级




考点1. 可以修饰比较级的词
常用来修饰比较级的词或短语有：
a bit, a little, rather, much, far, by far, a lot, a great deal, any, still, even等。
by far的用法：
用于强调，意为“……得多” “最最……” “显然”等，可修饰形容词或副词的比较级和最高级 (?http:?/??/?www.yywords.com?/?Article?/?200805?/?280.html?)，通常置于其后，但是若比较级 (?http:?/??/?www.yywords.com?/?Article?/?200809?/?499.html?)或最高级 (?http:?/??/?www.yywords.com?/?Article?/?200805?/?280.html?)前有冠词 (?http:?/??/?www.yywords.com?/?Article?/?download?/?Index.html?)，则可置于其前或其后。如：
It’s quicker by far to go by train. 乘火车要快得多。
She ran fastest by far. 她跑得最快(显然她跑得最快)。
He’s by far the cleverer student.
他是个聪明得多的孩子。
He is by far the best teacher.
=He is the best teacher by far.
他是最最好的老师(他显然是最好的老师)。
1. You are such a woman as always think _____ of yourself than others.
A. much B. much more
C. little D. much less
2. 【2004福建】The number of people present at the concert was _____ than expected. There were many tickets left.
A. much smaller B. much more?
C. much larger D. many more
3. —The novel is, I have to say, not a bit interesting. How do you find it?
—Why! It’s _____ that I have ever read.
A. a most interesting
B. a more interested
C. a less interesting
D. by far (答疑qq 329950885) the most interesting
4. 【2007 全国II】After two years’ research, we now have a _____ better understanding of the disease.
A. very B. far C. fairly D. quite
5. —The disease he suffers is not easy to cure.
—I know, but is he _____ better?
A. much B. rather C. any D. little
6. 【2000上海】You’re standing too near the camera. Can you move _____?
A. a bit far B. a little farther?
C. a bit of farther D. a little far
7. 【2006江苏】I wish you’d do _____ talking and some more work. Thus things will become better.?
A. a bit less B. any less??
C. much more D. a little more?
考点2. more、much与比较级
more 放在多音节形容词和副词前构成比较级，如：more interesting, more exciting。
单音节词和部分双音节词在后面加-er构成比较级，如：taller, earlier, hotter。
much修饰比较级。如：much more interesting, much taller。而像much more taller /more taller是错误的。
8. 【1991全国】The experiment was _____ easier than we had expected.
A. more B. much more
C. much D. more much
9. 【1994全国】If there were no examinations, we should have _____ at school.
A. the happiest time B. a more happier time
C. much happiest time D. a much happier time
考点3. 比较级的否定形式表示最高级的意思
有时比较级用于否定句时，可以表达最高级的意思。
10. Boris has brains. In fact, I doubt whether anyone in the class has _____ IQ.
A. a high B. a higher
C. the higher D. the highest
11. —What do you think of the service here?
—Oh, _____. We couldn’t have found a better place.
A. too bad B. sorry
C. wonderful D. impossible
12. 【2010全国Ⅱ】 Mr. Black is very happy because the clothes made in his factory have never been _____.
A. popular B. more popular
C. most popular D. the most popular
13. 【2011全国II】Mr. Stevenson is great to work for—I really couldn’t ask for a _____ boss.
A. better B. good C. best D. still better
14. 【2011四川】—How is your recent trip to Sichuan?
—I’ve never had _____ one before.
A. a pleasant B. a more pleasant
C. a most pleasant D. the most pleasant
15. 【2013浙江】I ______ myself more —it was a perfect day.
A. shouldn’t have enjoyed
B. needn’t have enjoyed
C. wouldn’t have enjoyed
D. couldn’t have enjoyed
考点4. not +比较级与 no +比较级
no和比较级连用时，常表示它所修饰形容词或副词的相反的意思。
He is no taller than him.
他比他高不到哪儿去。（他和他一样矮）
My English is no better than yours.
我的英语比你的好不到哪儿去。（一样差）
16. —Can Li Hua help me with my English?
—I regret to tell you her English is _____ yours.
A. as good as B. no more than
C. no better than D. as much as
17. The technical college education is playing an important part today and its role will be _____ important.??
A. no less B. no more
C. none the less D. not more
考点5. —Is Mr. White out of danger?
—No, _____ than before, I’m afraid.
A. no better B. a little better
C. not worse D. no worse
考点6. less构成比较级
18. She is _____ than her younger sister.???
A. less richer B. not more rich?
C. less rich D. not rich
19. 【2006北京】This washing machine is environmentally friendly because it uses _____ water and electricity than _____ models.?
A. less; older B. less; elder
C. fewer; older D. fewer; elder
考点7. “变得”后常跟比较级
改错：Our world is getting small and small.
解析：改为Our world is getting smaller and smaller.在这里，是指比原来更小，所以用比较级。再如：
The days are getting longer and longer.
20. 【2004全国】Mary kept weighing herself to see how much _____ she was getting. ?
A. heavier B. heavy????
C. the heavier D. the heaviest
21. 【2009全国I】How much _____ she looked without her glasses!
A. well B. good
C. best D. better
考点8. come earlier next time
改错：A: I’m sorry I’m late.
B: That’s OK. But come early next time.
解析：把early改为earlier。在汉语中，说“下次早点来”就可以。但在英语中，强调这次晚了，下次不能再这样了，要比这次早，所以要用比较级。
22. This ruler is too short. I need a _____ one.
A. long B. longer
C. more long D. more longer
23. 【2013新课标Ⅱ】It may not be a great suggestion. But before ______ is put forward, we’ll make do with it.
A. a good one B. a better one
C. the best one D. a best one
考点9. 在比较级中用to而不用than的几个词
某些以-ior结尾的形容词进行比较时，用to代替than。这些词有inferior（劣等的，次的）、superior（较好的，优于……）、junior（资历较浅的）、senior（资格较老的）、prior（在……之前）等。
He is superior to Mr. Zhang in chemistry.
考点10. the+比较级
句中有than时用比较级，如：He is taller than his brother.
用于两者时，若在名词前做定语，或后跟of 短语时常用the+比较级。如：
The taller boy is my brother.
He is the taller of the two boys.
24. 【1995上海】If the manager had to choose between the two, he would say John was _____ choice.
A. good B. the best
C. better D. the better
25. 【2006安徽】Of the two sisters, Betty is _____ one, and she is also the one who loves to be quiet.
A. a younger B. a youngest
C. the younger D. the youngest
26. 【2007四川】Of the two coats, I’d choose the _____ one to spare some money for a book.
A. cheapest B. cheaper
C. more expensive D. most expensive
考点11. 同类异质比较:he is more hard-working than
clever“与其说，不如说”
I. 异类同质比较：(答疑qq 329950885)即指两个不同的人或事物（异类）在同一方面（同质）进行比较。如：My room is smaller than yours. 我的房间比你的小。
Our country is more powerful than theirs. 我们的国家比他们的国家更强大。
II. 同类异质比较：即指同一个人或事物（同类）在两个不同的方面（异质）进行比较，这类句子常译为“是……，而不是”、“与其说……不如说……”等。如：
He was more lucky than clever.
他是靠运气而不是靠聪明。
She was more surprised than angry.
她感到更多的是惊讶而不是生气。
按英语习惯，在进行同类异质比较时，只能用more构成比较级，不能用-er形式，(答疑qq 329950885)即使是单音节词也是如此。
27. —Oh, how fat he is!
—But I think he is _____ than fat.
A. short B. shorter C. more short D. shortest
28. —I wonder why Mary is so unfriendly to us.
—She is _____ than unfriendly, I’m afraid.
A. shyer B. much shyer
C. shy more D. more shy
29. —Do you think him naughty enough?
—I’m afraid he’s _____ than naughty.
A. more clever B. clever?
C. much clever D. much more clever
考点12. the more, the more
I. “the more..., the more...”句型常表示“越……就越……”, 是一个复合句,其中前面的句子是状语从句,后面的句子是主句。the用在形容词或副词的比较级前, more代表形容词或副词的比较级。
The more he gets, the more he wants.
The more she learns, the more she wants to learn.
II. “the more..., the more...”句型, 主从句的时态常用一般现在时或一般过去时。
The higher the ground is, the thinner air becomes.
The harder he worked, the more he got.
III. 若主句的谓语动词用一般将来时,从句的谓语动词要用一般现在时表示将来。
The harder you work, the greater progress you will make.
The longer the war lasts, the more the people there will suffer.
30. A body weighs less ______ it gets from the surface of the earth.
A. far B. farther
C. the farther D. the farthest
31. Ash and bits of rock were falling onto the ship, darker and more, ______ they went.
A. close B. the closer
C. closer D. more closer
32. 【1993上海】It’s believed that ______ you work, ______ result you’ll get.
A. the harder; the better
B. the more hard; the more better
C. the harder; a better???
D. more hard; more better
33. 【2001上海】In recent years travel companies have succeeded in selling us the idea that the further we go, ______.
A. our holiday will be better
B. our holiday will be the better
C. the better our holiday will be
D. the better will our holiday be
34. 【2002上海】As far as I am concerned, education is about learning and the more you learn, _____.
A. the more for life are you equipped
B. the more equipped for life you are
C. the more life you are equipped for
D. you are equipped the more for life
考点13. 比较级+and+比较级
此句型表示“越来越……”，单音节形容词或副词用“-er + and + -er”，多音节形容词和副词常用“more and more+形容词或副词”。如：
Things are getting better and better every day.
情况一天天好起来。
It’s becoming more and more difficult to find a job.
找工作越来越困难了。
Holiday flight tickets are getting less and less expensive.假日机票越来越便宜了。





第3讲 最高级




考点1. 形容词最高级前的the不能省略，而副词最高级前的the可以省略
1. 【2009辽宁】This area experienced _____ heaviest rainfall in _____ month of May.
A /; a B a ; the C the ; the D the ; a
2. 【2012全国Ⅱ】Next to biology, I like physics _____.
A. better B. best C. the better D. very well
考点2. least也可用来构成最高级
He is the most careless boy in our class.
他是我们班级最粗心的男孩。
He is the least careful boy in our class.
他是我们班级最不细心的男孩。
3. 【2005江苏】David has won the first prize in singing; he is still very excited now and feels _____ desire to go to bed.
A. the most B. more C. worse D. the least
4. 【2007 上海】Alan is a careful driver, but he drives _____ of my friends.
A. more carefully B. the most carefully
C. less carefully D. the least carefully
考点3. 形容词最高级前有时加不定冠词，或不加冠词，不表最高级，表示“非常”
He is a most clever young policeman.（a most=very）
他是一个非常聪明的年轻警察。
The film is most interesting.（most=very）
这个电影非常有趣。
It’s a most important problem. ( most=very)
这是一个非常重要的问题。
5. Changsha is _____most beautiful inland city and we believe we’ll come for _____ second time.
A. a; the B. the; a C. the; the D. a; a
考点4. 形容词最高级前省略the的情况
一般来说,形容词最高级前要加定冠词“the”。如：
Li Ming is the tallest student in our class.
李明是我们班最高的学生。 但例外也有：
1 形容词最高级作表语，用于同一个人或同一个物在不同情况下进行比较，而不与别的人或事物相比，这种情况形容词最高级前不用“the”，但如果它后面接上名词，即使作表语，“the”也不能省略。如：
I am busiest on Monday. 我周一最忙。(答疑qq 329950885)（该句是把“我”在不同时候忙的程度相比较。并没有跟别的人相比较）
The pool is deepest in summer. 这个池塘夏天水最深。（把同一池塘在不同季节的水深相比较，并没有与其他池塘相比较）
2 形容词最高级前若有物主代词、指示代词或名词所有格修饰，则不能再加the。
That’s her best dress.
The girl wants this biggest apple.
Disney’s greatest wish was to become a famous artist.
3 在as, though 引导的倒装让步状语中，形容词最高级前不用the。
Youngest as he was, he got the first prize.尽管他年龄最小，他得了一等奖。
4 当两个形容词最高级修饰一个名词时，后一个最高级前面的the通常省略。
This is the largest and finest building in Shanghai.
5 形容词最高级作宾语补足语时常省略“the”。如：
I think it best to go over it again and again.
我认为最好反复地检查一下。
John found it most difficult to learn Chinese.
约翰觉得学习汉语最困难。




写作专练1. 正确使用比较级最高级相关知识（P. 226 )





第4讲 倍数表达法


考点1.

考点1. 表达“是……的几倍”
先用as…as表达“一样”，然后把倍数用在第一个as前。
如：要表达“这棵树是那棵树三倍高”，先表达：这棵树和那棵树一样高。
This tree is as tall as that one.
然后在第一个as前添上倍数three times。
This tree is three times as tall as that one.
再如：他父亲的年龄是他的两倍。先表达：His father is as old as he.
再在第一个as前加上倍数：
His father is twice as old as he.
1. 【2002上海春】Americans eat _____ vegetables per person today as they did in 1910.
A. more than twice B. as twice as many
C. twice as many as D. more than twice as many
2. 【2008陕西】Ten years ago the population of our village was _____ that of theirs.
A. as twice large as ? B. twice as large as
C. twice as much as D. as twice much as
3. 【2009四川】My uncle’s house in the downtown area is much smaller than ours, but it is twice _____ expensive.
A. as B. so C. too D. very
4. 【2012全国新课标】This restaurant wasn’t _____ that other restaurant we went to.
A. half as good as B. as half good as
C. as good as half D. good as half as
5. 【2013安徽】It’s said that the power plant is now ______ large as what it was.
A. twice as B. as twice
C. twice much D. much twice
考点2. 表达“比……大/小几倍”
先用一般的比较级来表达“比……大/小”，然后在比较级前加上倍数。
如：要表达“这条河比那条河长两倍”，先表达：
这条河比那条河长。
This river is longer than that one.
然后在比较级前添上倍数twice。
This river is twice longer than that one.
注意：This room is twice larger than that one. 等同于：
This room is three times as large as that one.
6. These planes can fly _____ than the old ones.
A. as fast three times B. three times as fast
C. three times fast D. three times faster
7. More than one thousand American soldiers have been killed in Iraqi since the war began almost two years ago. And it’s reported that the number of Iraqis killed is _____.
A. many times higher B. higher many times
C. many times high D. high many times
8. The US is about the same size as China, but its population is five times _____.
A.?as little B. smaller
C. as few D. fewer
考点3. 倍数 +名词
倍数可直接用在表示度量的名词前。
The newly broadened square is four times the size of the previous one.
刚扩建的广场的大小是先前的四倍。
The size of the newly broadened square is four times that of the previous one.
The length of the road is four times what it was three years ago.
这条路的长度是三年前的四倍。
精品-高中英语语法通霸-4.形容词和副词比较级和最高级常考点分类专项总结归纳讲解与高考真题详细练习题及答案.doc
9. If you offered me six times _____ you have just offered, I would still take my pound of flesh.
A. what B. which C. that D. when
10. Paper produced every year is _____ the world’s production of vehicles.
A. the three weight of B. three times the weight of
C. as three times heavy as D. three times as heavier as
11. —What’s wrong? You seem restless.??
—I was reduced to paying ____ price for it.
A. double the B. double of the? ?
C. double D. double of




写作专练2. 正确使用倍数表达法（P. 227)



答案：

第4章 形容词和副词的比较等级
第1讲 关于than和as
1. B 2. B 3. A 4. C 5. C
6. C 7. B
第2讲 比较级
1. D 2. A 3. D 4. B 5. C
6. B 7. A 8. C 9. D 10. B
11. C 12. B 13. A 14. B 15. D
16. C 17. A 18. A 19. C 20. A
21. A 22. D 23. B 24. B 25. D
26. C 27. B 28. C 29. D 30. A
31. C 32. B 33. A 34. C 35. B
第3讲 最高级
1. C 2. B 3. D 4. D 5. D
第4讲 倍数表达法
1. D 2. B 3. A 4. A 5. A
6. D 7. A 8. B 9. A 10. B
11. A





















7





动词短语和常用习惯表达

动词短语是许多省高考的必考内容。有时一个动词可以跟多个小品词构成多个短语动词，有时一个短语动词又有多个意思。在平时的学习中，我们要有意识地去积累这方面的知识，这样才能使学习更高效。掌握好常用的动词短语和习惯表达对于我们做完形和阅读的帮助也很大。


第1讲 常用动词短语（一）


考点1.

考点2. break相关短语
break down （机器、车辆）停止运转；（健康、精神）崩溃；（系统、讨论等）出问题；分解
break away 打破陈规，放弃习惯；奋力挣脱
break out （战争、疫情、火灾等）爆发
break in/into 破门而入
break up 打碎、分裂；分手
1 Let’s break up the whole into parts.
让我们化整为零。
2 You must break away from these old customs.
你们必须破除这些旧风俗。
3 The dog broke away from its owner and ran away.
狗挣脱了主人，跑了。
4 After a long time of hard work，he almost broke down.
长时间艰苦劳动之后，他的身体几乎垮了。
5 Why did the peace talks break down？
为什么和谈失败了？
6 This matter will break down in water.
这种物质在水中会分解。
1. 【2012 陕西】He had to pause from time to time to wipe the sweat from his forehead, because the air-conditioning system ______.
A. broke in B. broke up
C. broke out D. broke down
2. 【2013福建】Old-fashioned phones matter when wireless networks ______ in disasters.
A. turn down B. turn out
C. break down D. break out
3. 【2009江苏】— I’ m surprised to hear that Sue and Paul have ______.
—So am I. They seemed very happy together when I last saw them.
A. broken up B. finished up
C. divided up D. closed up
4. 【2006辽宁】The computer system?______ suddenly while he was searching for information on the Internet.?
A. broke down B. broke out?
C. broke up D. broke in?
5. 【2006广东】I was still sleeping when the fire?______, and then it spread quickly.?
A. broke out? B. put out?
C. came out? D. got out???
考点3. call相关短语
call at a place 拜访某地
call on/upon sb. 拜访或看望某人
call for sth. (sb.) 需要，要求；接（某人）、来取（某物）；喊着要人取来
call off 叫走，转移开；取消，不举行
call on/upon sb. to do sth. 号召某人做某事
call up (给……)打电话；想起，回忆起
call in 收回，召回
call out 大声喊
1 Call your dog off. 把你的狗叫走。
2 The match was called off because of bad weather.
由于天气不好，比赛取消了。
3 This problem calls for careful thought.
这个问题需要好好想一想。
4 I’ll?call?for?you?at?seven?this?evening.
今晚七点我来接你。?
5 We?call?for?the?package?at?the?post?office.
我们到邮局去取包裹。
6 The toy company has decided to call in the defective products all over the world.
该玩具公司已决定在全世界范围内召回那些有缺陷的产品。
7 They?boy?called?out?for?help. 那个男孩大声呼救。
6. 【2009福建】The Somali robbed frequent attacks on the sea urged the United Nations to______ all nations to take immediate action.
A. fight for B. apply for C. call on D. wait on
7. 【2007山东】It’s the sort of work that ______ a high level of concentration.
A. calls for B. makes up
C. lies in D. stands for
8. 【2006湖北】As I grew up in a small town at the foot of a mountain, the visit to the village ______scenes of my childhood.?
A. called up? B. called for?
C. called on? D. called in?
考点4. come相关短语
come about 发生（不及物）；（bring about，使发生，及物）
come across 偶然遇到（ meet with和run into也有这个意思）
come along 进展；一起来
come up with 想出（主意或计划等）
come out （书、唱片、电影等）出版发行；
（花）开放
come to oneself 苏醒过来（oneself可以省略）
come to realize 开始意识到
come up （在谈话或会议中）被提及，被讨论
1 Things are coming along fine.
事情进展顺利。
2 When does their new album come out?
他们的新(答疑qq 329950885)唱片什么时候发行？
3 The subject came up at the meeting yesterday.
这个话题昨天在会议上被提及。
9. 【2011安徽】If you ______ faults but you still want the bicycle, ask the shop assistant to reduce the price.
A. come across B. care about
C. look for D. focus upon
10. 【2011天津】She ______ an old friend of hers yesterday while she was shopping at the department store.
A. turned down B. dealt with
C. took after D. came across
11. 【2013新课标Ⅱ】Would you like to ______ with us to the film tonight?
A. come along B. come off
C. come across D. come through
12. 【2007江苏】—Have you ______ some new ideas?
—Yeah. I’ll tell you later.
A. come about B. come into
C. come up with D. come out with
13. 【2006湖北】It’s already 10 o’clock I wonder how it _______ that she was two hours late on such a short trip.?
A. came over? B. came out?
C. came about?? D. came up
14. 【2005重庆】His idea of having weekly family meals together, which seemed difficult at first, has ______ many good changes in their lives.
A. got through?? B. resulted from
C. turned into? D. brought about
考点5. cut相关短语
cut down/back 减少
cut in 插话；（车从前面突然）插入
cut off 切断、终止（供应、电话等）；
使与外界隔断
cut up 切成碎片
1 The government has announced plans to cut back on defence spending by 10% next year.
政府已宣布计划明年减少防务开支10%。
2 I’m trying to cut down on caffeine.
我在尽力减少咖啡因的服用量。
3 I was just talking to Jane, when Dave cut in (on us / our conversation).
我正和Jane谈话，这时Dave突然插话进来。
4 Did you see that white car cut in (on us/ in front of us)?
你看到那辆白色的车突然插入（到我们前面）了吗？
5 If this bill is not paid within five days, your gas supply will be cut off.
如果这个账单五天内不付，你的液化气供应将会被切断。
6 Many villages have been cut off by the heavy snow.
许多村庄因为网搜语法通霸大雪与外面隔断。
7 He cut the wood up to build a fire.
他把木头破碎来生火。
15. 【2013陕西】My uncle hasn’t been able to quit smoking, but at least he has ______.
A. cut out B. cut down
C. cut up D. cut off
16. 【2005湖南】I was just talking to Margot when Jackson ______.
A. cut in? B. cut down?
C. cut out? D. cut up
考点6. get相关短语
get along/on （人）相处融洽；（工作）进展……
get down to 开始认真做某事（to是介词）
get through 结束、完成；成功地联络；通过（考试）；渡过难关（也常用go through, be through）
get away 逃脱；离开
get away with 做成某坏事而未被发觉或处罚
get changed 换衣
get across 使理解，使相信
get over 战胜、克服（困难……）
get together 聚会
get to sb. 使某人受到影响（cause sb. to suffer or be upset）
1 How are you getting along/on with your job?
你的工作进展得怎么样？
2 She got through her exams without too much trouble.
她没有遇到太大麻烦就通过了考试。
3 I don’t know how I got through the first couple of months after Andy’s death.
我不知道在安迪死后我是怎样度过前几个月的。
4 The thief got away in the dark.
那个贼趁着黑暗逃脱了。
5 If someone commits a murder, he won’t get away with it.
如果一个人犯了谋杀罪，他是不会逃脱惩罚的。
6 I wanted to come along, but couldn’t get away.
我想要一起走，但是走不开。
7 We tried to get our point across, but he just wouldn’t listen.
我们尽力想使他理解我们的意思，但他就是不听。
8 The heat was beginning to get to me, so I went indoors.
炎热开始使我感到难受，因此我走进屋里。
9 I know he’s annoying, but you shouldn’t let him get to you.
我知道他很烦人，但你不应当让他影响你。
17. 【2010福建】We’ve just moved into a bigger house and there’s a lot to do. Let’s______ it.
A. keep up with B. do away with
C. get down to D. look forward to
18. 【2013天津】I had hoped to take a holiday this year but I wasn’t able to ______.
A. get away B. drop in
C. check out D. hold on
19. 【2013江苏】Team leaders must ensure that all members ______ their natural desire to avoid the embarrassment associated with making mistakes.
A. get over B. look over
C. take over D. come over
20. 【2007湖北】If we can ______ our present difficulties, then everything should be all right.
A. come across B. get over
C. come over D. get off
21. 【2010浙江】After that, he knew he could ______ any emergency by doing what be could to the best of his ability.
A. get away with B. get on with
C. get through D. get across
22. 【2007天津】Hardly could he ______ this amount of work in such a short time.
A. get through B. get off
C. get into D. get down
23. 【2009全国I】(答疑qq 329950885)I tried phoning her office, but I couldn’t______.
A. get along B. get on
C. get to D. get through
24. 【2008陕西】It’s going to rain. Xiao Feng, will you please help me ______ the clothes on the line?
A. get off B. get back
C. get in D. get on　　
25. 【2008四川】I used to quarrel a lot with my parents, but now we______ fine.
A. look out B. stay up
C. carry on D. get along　
26. 【2006重庆】—How are you managing to do your work without an assistant?
—Well，I ______somehow.?
A. get along B. come on
C. watch out?? D. set off?
27. 【2004全国I】 Sarah, hurry up. I’m afraid you can’t have time to ______ before the party.
A. get changed B. get change
C. get changing D. get to change
考点7. ?give相关短语
give away 捐赠；泄露（秘密）
give in 屈服，投降
give out （机器或身体某部分stop working）停止工作（指人可译作“筋疲力尽”）；用完、用尽；分发（作业、文件、物品）；散布、公布（消息、文件等）
give off/out 发出（气味、热、光等）
give up 放弃（后跟动名词）
1 The party was meant to be a surprise, but Sharon gave it away.
本打算这个派对秘密准备，但Sharon却泄了密。
2 She thinks no one knows how much she likes him, but her face gave her away!
她认为没有人知道她多么爱他，但她的表情却告诉了我们一切。
3 All machines gave out eventually.
所有的机器最终都停止了运转。
4 Our?food?supplies?gave?out.
我们的食物供应已经用完。
5 Both the man and the horse gave out after the long ride. 赶了很长一段路后，人马俱乏。
6 The government gave out food to people out of work. 政府向失业者分发食品。
7 They stood there, giving out the leaflets to the passers-by.
他们站在那里, 向过路人散发传单。
8 This milk must be bad, for it is giving off a nasty smell. 牛奶一定变质了，因为它散发出一种令人恶心的气味。
9 The sun gives out light and heat to the earth. 太阳向地球发出光和热。
10 He?gave?up?teaching?only?two?years?ago.?
两年前他才离开教学工作的。?
28. 【2008江西】If a person has not had enough sleep, his actions will give him ______during the day.
A. away B. up C. in D. back
29. 【2007福建】The news of the mayor’s coming to our school for a visit was ______ on the radio yesterday.
A. turned out B. found out C. given out D. carried out
30. 【2005山东】What shall we use for power when all the oil in the world has ______?
?A. given out??B. put out????C. held up???D. used up
考点8. go相关短语
go about 着手做某事（begin to do/deal with sth.），后跟动名词；到处走动
go over 复习；仔细察看
go off 爆炸；（枪、闹铃）响
go red/ mad/ blind/ hungry go是系动词，“变得”
go ahead (with) 开始(继续)做某事
go through (法律、计划等)通过，批准；经受（困难）；全面检查
1 How can we go about solving this problem?
我们怎样着手解决这个问题？
2 Didn’t you hear your alarm clock going off this morning?
你没听到你的闹钟今天早上响了吗？
3 We’ve received permission to go ahead with the music festival in spite of opposition from local residents.
尽管当地居民反对，我们得到允许继续举办音 乐节。
4 I always go over my revision notes just before I go into an exam.
在考试之前，我总是认真复习我的复习笔记。
5 You must go over the instructions of how it works before you use the micro-wave oven.
在使用微波炉前要先看看它的使用说明。
6 I’m going through my wardrobe and throwing out all the clothes I don’t wear any more.
我全面检查了我的衣柜，网搜语法通霸把我不穿的衣服都拿了出来。
7 Remember to go through the pockets before you put those trousers in the washing machine.
在把裤子放进洗衣机之前，记着看一下口袋。
31. 【2007安徽】—Didn’t you have a good time at the party?
—Of course I did. As a matter of fact, I had such fun that time seemed to ______ so quickly.
A. go by B. go away
C. go out D. go over
32. 【2007江苏】—Do you think that housing price will keep ______ in the years to come?
—Sorry, I have no idea.
A. lifting up B. going up
C. bringing up D. growing up
33. 【2007浙江】Would you please ______this form for me to see if I’ve filled it in right?
A. take off B. look after
C. give up D. go over
34. 【2011四川】To get a better grade, you should __________the notes again before the test.
A. go over B. get over
C. turn over D. take over



写作专练1. 熟练使用常用动词短语（一）
(参看P. 227)







第2讲 常用动词短语（二）


考点1.

考点2. look相关短语
look around/about 环视四周
look back on sth. 回顾(某事)，回想(某事)
look down on 看不起，瞧不起
look forward to 期待，盼望（后跟动名词）
look up 抬头看；(在书、字典中)查找；好转
look over 审阅，检查（to quickly examine）
look sb. over 上下打量（某人）
look through 翻阅，浏览（to read sth. quickly ）
look into sth. 调查，研究，了解；
look into one’s eyes直视
look out 注意，小心（也可用watch out!）
look out for 留意（try to notice，也可用watch out for, keep an eye out for）
look up to sb. 钦佩、敬仰某人（look down upon瞧不起）
look after 照料，照看
look on/upon sb. as 把某人当作……看待
1 I still shudder when I look back on the past.
想起过去，我仍然不寒而栗。
2 Things are looking up. 情况在好转。
3 You shouldn’t look down upon the poor.
你不应该瞧不起穷人。
4 The police are looking into the cause of the accident.
警方正调查事故原因。
5 Look out. There’s a car coming! 当心!汽车来了!
6 I had a few minutes before the meeting to look over what he’d written.
在会前我有几分钟时间来快速查看他写的内容。
7 He looked her over and nodded lightly.
他上下打量她，然后微微点了点头。
8 We looked on her as a daughter.
我们把她当作女儿看待。
9 While shopping here, you must look out for pickpockets.
在这里购物时，你一定要留意扒手。
10 Many fans look up to Yao Ming.
许多粉丝都很钦佩姚明。
1. 【2011四川】I often ______ the words I don’t know in the dictionary or on the Internet.
A. look up B. look at
C. look for D. look into
2. 【2009湖北】Would you please ______ the paper for me and see if there are any obvious mistakes?
A. look around B. look into
C. look up D. look through
3. 【2009江西】It is reported that the police will soon ______ the case of two missing children.
A. look upon B. look after
C. look into D. look out
4. 【2007全国I】“Goodbye, then,” she said, without even ______ from her book.
A. looking down B. looking up
C. looking away D. looking on
5. 【2010安徽】No matter how low you consider yourself , there is always someone ______ you wishing they were that high.
A. getting rid of B. getting along with
C. looking up to D. looking down upon
考点3. pay相关短语
pay back 偿还；报复
pay off 还清（债务、欠款）；
（付出得到）回报
pay sb. some money for sth. 因为某物/事付给某人多少钱
pay down 当场支付，现金支付
1 Can you lend me some money? I’ll pay you/it back tomorrow.
你能借给我一些钱吗？我明天还你。
2 He swore he’d pay her back for all she’d done to him.
他发誓他要为她所做的一切报复她。
3 We should be able to pay off the debt within two years. 我们应该两年内能还清债务。
4 All her hard work paid off in the end, and she finally passed the exam.
她所有的(答疑qq 329950885)努力最后都得到了回报，她终于通过了网搜语法通霸考试。
6. 【2012安徽】The athlete’s years of hard training ______ when she finally won the Olympic gold medal.
A. went on B. got through
C. paid off D. ended up
7. 【2013新课标Ⅱ】The watch was very good, and he ______ 20 percent down for it.
A. paid B. cost C. bought D. spent
考点4. pick相关短语
pick up 捡起，拿起
去拿某物，去接某人
中途搭载乘客
（在实践中）学得（语言习惯等）
买（便宜货），用较少的钱买到
见到、听到、闻到（微弱光、声音、气味）
（无线电）接收到（信号）
（中断后）重新开始，继续
跌倒后站(爬)起来
increase or improve 增加、改善：
（风）变大，（车）提速，
(生意?生产?天气?健康等)好转? 有起色等
pick out (从众多人、物中)辨认出；挑选
1 I went to pick up the phone/receiver, but it had stopped ringing.
我去想拿起电话听筒，但它已停止响了。
2 When you’re in town, could you pick up the books I ordered?
当你在(答疑qq 329950885)镇上的时候，请把我订购的书拿回来好吗？
3 Whose turn is it to pick the children up after school?
该谁去接孩子了？
4 The train stopped several times to pick up passengers. 火车沿途停了好几次,让乘客上车?
5 My friends knew where to pick up a good second-hand bike. 我的朋友知道在哪里可以便宜地买到好的二手自行车?
6 We picked up the harbor lights as we sailed along.我们向前航行时看见了港口灯塔。
7 Police dogs picked up the scent（气味） of the two men from clothes they had left behind.
警犬从那两个人丢在后面的衣服上闻到了他们的气味。
8 Can you pick up Moscow on your radio?
你的收音机能收到莫斯科电台吗？
9 After lunch shall we pick up where we left off yesterday?
午饭后我们从我们昨天停的那个地方开始吗？
10 She fell off her bike, but quickly picked herself up.
她从自行车上摔了下来, 但马上爬了起来?
11 The truck picked up speed slowly.
卡车慢慢提速。
12 The wind always picks up in the evening.
夜晚时风总是变大。
13 His spirits picked up when he got the good news.
当得知好消息后，他精神焕发。
14 The economy is finally beginning to pick up again.
经济终于又开始有所好转?
15 He picked up nicely after a long careful treat.
经过较长时间精心治疗后,他的健康恢复得很好。
It seems as if the weather may pick up soon.
看上去天气好像很快要放晴了?
Let me pick out some good ones for you.
让我来替你挑几个好的。
8. 【2012四川】It’s surprising that your brother ______ Russian so quickly—he hasn’t lived there very long.
A. picked up B. looked up
C. put up D. made up
9. 【2010山东】Sam ______some knowledge of the computer just by watching others working on it.
A. brought up B. looked up
C. picked up D. set up
10. 【2007四川】It was so dark in the cinema that I could hardly ______ my friend.
A. turn out B. bring out
C. call out D. pick out
考点5. put相关短语
put aside 留出（钱或时间等）；暂置一边
put sth. away 把某物收拾起来
put sth. back 放回原处
put down 镇压；写下；放下
put forward 提出（建议等）
put off 推迟（后跟动名词作宾语）
put on 穿衣；上演
put out 扑灭（火）
put up 张贴；搭建；举起；
提供临时住处
put up with 忍受
1 He put aside some money every month for future uses.
他每月都留出一部分钱以备后用。
2 Let’s put our differences aside.
让我们把我们的异议先搁置一边。
3 The proposals that you have put forward deserve serious consideration.
你提出的建议值得认真考虑。
4 Sally is putting me up for the weekend.
这个周末我住Sally家。
5 I can’t put off going to the dentist any longer.
我再也不能推迟去看牙医了。
6 Never put off until tomorrow what you can do today.
不要把今天能做的事推到明天做。
11. 【2011全国新课标】I can ______ the house being untidy, but I hate it if it’s not clean.
A. come up with B. put up with
C. turn to D. stick to
12. 【2011辽宁】The exam results will be ______ on Friday afternoon.
A. put down B. put off
C. put up D. put away
13. 【2013新课标I】At the last moment, Tom decided to ______ a new character to make the story seem more likely.
A. put up B. put in
C. put on D. put off
14. 【2011浙江】He decided that he would drive all the way home instead of ______ at a hotel for the night.
A. putting down B. putting off
C. putting on D. putting up
15. 【2012新课标全国】Mary is really good at taking notes in class. She can ______ almost every word her teacher says.
A. put out B. put down
C. put away D. put together
16. 【2008安徽】Don’t be so discouraged. If you ______ such feelings, you will do better next time.
A. carry on B. get back
C. break down D. put away　
17. 【2004全国II】The forest guards often find campfires that have not been ______ completely.
A. turned down B. put out
C. put away D. turned over
考点6. set相关短语
set about doing 开始，着手（to start to do or deal with something, 后跟动名词, 意同go about）
set out/off 出发（start a journey）
set out to do 开始做，着手做（to start an activity with a particular aim）
set off 点燃,引爆
set aside 留出（时间、钱等）；暂置一边
(也可用put aside)
set sb. apart 使区别开来
set down 写入、印入（正式文件中）
set up 建立（公司、组织、体系等）；
组织（会议、活动等）
sb. be set up 受陷害，中圈套
set back 推迟；使受挫
set/lay the table 整理餐桌（to put a cloth, knives and forks, etc. on the table in preparation for a meal）
set a record 创纪录
1 I’ve no idea how to set about changing a tyre on a car.
我不知道怎样着手换车上的轮胎。
2 I tried to apologize, but I think I set about it the wrong way.
我尽力想道歉，但是我想我一开始方式就错了。
3 He had some money in an account that he’d set aside for his kids.
他账户上有一些钱，是留出给他孩子用的。
4 I set aside half an hour every evening to hear Erik read.
我每天晚上留出半小时时间来听Erik读书。
5 In times of war people tend to set aside political differences.
在战争时期，人们倾向于把政治问题暂置一边。
6 What set her apart was that she had a lot of original ideas.
使她与众不同的是，她有许多原创的主意。
7 What time will we have to set off/out for the station tomorrow?
我们明天必须什么时候开始出发去车站？
8 They set out to discover a cure for cancer.
他们着手来寻找癌症的治愈办法。
9 Be careful that you don’t set the fireworks off by mistake.
当心点, 别弄错了引起那些爆竹爆炸。
10 The rules of the club are set down in the members’ handbook.
这个俱乐部的规章制度被印在成员的手册中。
11 A committee has been set up to organize social events in the college.
一个委员会被成立以组织大学的社交活动。
12 We need to set up a meeting to discuss the proposals.
我们需要组织一个会议来讨论这些提议。
13 They claimed that they weren’t selling drugs, but that they’d been set up by the police.
他们声称他们没有卖毒品，他们是中了警方的圈套。
14 The accident has set them back several weeks.
那次事故已使他们耽搁了几个星期。
15 All their efforts at reform have been set back.
他们所有的改革努力都遭受到挫折。
18. 【2012全国Ⅱ】We ______ to paint the whole house but finished only the front part that day.
A. set about B. set up C. set out D. set down
19. 【2012浙江】Armed with the information you have gathered , you can ______ preparing your business plan.
A. set out B. set about C. set off D. set up
20. 【2013安徽】Traditionally, college students hold a graduation ceremony to encourage themselves before they ______ on their life journey.
A. give up B. settle down
C. get through D. set off
21. 【2012福建】You had better ______ some time every day for sports so that you can keep yourself energetic.
A. set aside B. take up
C. put away D. give out
22. 【2008山东】Einstein liked Bose’s paper so much that he ______ his own work and translated it into German.
A. gave off B. turned down
C. took over D. set aside
23. 【2006江西】For all these years I have been working for others. I’m hoping I’ll ______ my own business someday.?
A. turn up? B. fix up?
C. set up D. make up
考点7. take相关短语
take apart 拆卸，拆开
take after sb. （在外貌、性格上）像某人
take down 写下，记下（别人所说的）
take effect 生效，起作用
take…for granted 想当然，认为……是真实的；
低估了……的价值
take sb. in 欺骗某人
take off 休假；（事业）腾飞；
脱衣；（飞机）起飞；
take on 展现出，呈现出 (begin to have a particular quality)
take over 接手，接管
take sth. out on sb. 拿某人出气
take up 占去时间、空间、位置等；
开始从事某项工作或活动
take chances 碰运气，冒险
1 He takes after his mother.
他长得像他的母亲。
精品-高中英语语法通霸-5.英语常考短语动词词语搭配专项总结归纳讲解例句与高考真题练习题及答案.doc
2 International sanctions were beginning to take effect.
国际制裁的效果开始显现出来。
3 The traffic laws don’t take effect until the end of the year. 交通法到年底才生效。
4 We have to re-educate the public about something they have always taken for granted.
关于一些公众一直认为是想当然的事情，我们不得不再对他们进行教育。
5 I can’t believe she was taken in by him.
我真不敢相信她被他骗了。
6 He took off two weeks in September.
他(答疑qq 329950885)9月休了两周假。
7 Her singing career had just begun to take off.
网搜语法通霸她的歌唱事业才刚刚腾飞。
8 Her voice took on a troubled tone.
她的声音中显示出她被什么事困扰着。
9 She took over as manager two weeks ago.
她两周前接手经理这一职位。
10 I know you’ve had a bad day, but there’s no need to take it out on me!
我知道你今天不顺心，但也没有必要拿我出气。
11 This desk takes up too much room.
这个桌子占去太多空间。
12 Have you ever thought of taking up acting ?
你考虑过从事演艺吗？
13 Dennis wasn’t a man to take chances.
丹尼斯不是一个靠碰运气做事的人。
24. 【2011陕西】Some insects ______ the colour of their surroundings to protect themselves.
A. take in B. take off C. take on D. take out
25. 【2012辽宁】Rod loves______clocks. However, he never manages to put them together again.
A. taking apart B. giving away
C. making up D. turning off
26. 【2013辽宁】Briggs will ______ as general manager when Mitchell retires.
A. get away B. take over
C. set off D. run out
27. 【2009安徽】We tried to find a table for seven，but they were all ______ .
A. given away B. kept away
C. taken up D. used up
28. 【2008全国I】After studying in a medical college for five years, Jane ______ her job as a doctor in the countryside.
A. set out B. took over C. took up D. set up　
29. 【2007辽宁】Don’t be ______ by products promising to make you lose weight quickly.
A. taken off B. taken out
C. taken away D. taken in
30. 【2006浙江】We’re trying to ring you back, Bryan, but we think we ______ your number incorrectly.?
A. looked up B. took down
C. worked out? D. brought about?
考点8. turn相关短语
turn against 背叛，反对
turn down 拒绝，谢绝（某人建议、忠告）；
关小（声音）
turn in 上交（也用hand in）
turn over 翻过来
turn to sb. for help 转向某人求助
turn out 聚集（参加公众活动或娱乐）
turn out (to be) 证明是，结果是
turn up （人或机会出乎意料或事先无计划地）出现
1 Please turn/hand in your homework on time.
请按时交作业。
2 After six years of fighting, public opinion has turned against the war.
经过六年战争之后，公众也开始反对这场战争。
3 He turned down the job because it involved too much travelling.
他拒绝了这个工作，因为它涉及太多旅行。
4 Thousands of people turned out to welcome the England team home.
数千人聚集在那里，来欢迎英国队归来。
5 She turned up at my house late one night.
一天夜里她突然来到我家。
6 This job turned up just when I needed it.
当我需要这个工作时，它突然出现了。
31. 【2010辽宁】Thousands of people ______ to watch yesterday’s match against Ireland.
A. turned on B. turned in
C. turned around D. turned out
32. 【2008全国II】—What are you reading, Tom?
—I’m not really reading, just ______ the pages.
A. turning off B. turning around
C. turning over D. turning up
33. 【2006全国2】With no one to ______ in such a frightening situation, she felt very helpless.?
A. turn to B. turn on C. turn off? C. turn over
34. 【2011江苏】—You look upset. What’s the matter?
—I had my proposal ______ again.
A. turned over B. turned on
C. turned off D. turned down



写作专练2. 熟练使用常用动词短语（二）
(参看P.227)





第3讲 其他常考动词短语和惯用表达




考点1. 其他动词短语
1. 【2007陕西】We had wanted to finish our task by noon, but it didn’t quite ______.
A. find out B. give out
C. hand out D. work out
2. 【2008天津】The meal over, the managers went back to the meeting room to ______ their discussion.
A. put away B. take down
C. look over D. carry on
3. 【2008浙江】American Indian ____ about five percent of the U.S. population.
A. fill up B. bring up C. make up D. set up　　
4. 【2008湖北】The teacher stressed again that the students should not ____ any important details while retelling the story.　
A. bring out B. let out
C. leave out D. make out　　
5. 【2008湖北】In modern times, people have to learn to ___ all kinds of pressure although they are leading a comfortable life.
A. keep with B. stay with
C. meet with D. live with　　
6. 【2008湖北】The present situation is very complex, so I think it will take me some time to ______ its reality.
A. make up B. figure out
C. look through D. put off　　　
7. 【2008福建】 _____ a moment and I will go to your rescue.
A. Go on B. Hold on
C. Move to D. Carry on
8. 【2007浙江】We firmly believe that war never settles anything. It only ______violence.
A. runs into B. comes from
C. leads to D. begins with
9. 【2006湖北】Although the wind has ______, the rain remains steady, so you still need a raincoat.?
A. turned up? B. gone back?
C. died down D. blown out??
10. 【2005广东】John is leaving for London tomorrow and I will ______ him ______ at the airport.
A. send; away? B. leave; off?
C. see; off D. show; around
11. 【2005浙江】The president spoke at the business meeting for nearly an hour without ______ his notes.
A. bringing up? B. referring to ?
C. looking for? D. trying on
12. 【2005辽宁】Could you please tell me where you bought the shoes you ______ yesterday?
?A. tried on? B. put on? C. had on? D. pulled on
13. 【2011福建】Born into a family with three brothers, David was ______ to value the sense of sharing.
A. brought up B. turned down
C. looked after D. held back
14. 【2012湖北】Walking alone in the dark, the boy whistled to ______ his courage.
A. hold up B. keep up C. set up D. take up
15. 【2012湖北】I’m so glad you’ve come here to______ this matter in person.
A. lead to B. see to C. turn to D. refer to
16. 【2012重庆】Food supplies in the flood-stricken area ______. We must act immediately before there’s none left.
A. have run out B. are running out
C. have been run out D. are being run out
17. 【2010江苏】The experiment has ______ the possibility of the existence of any life on that planet, but it does not mean there is no life on other planets.
A. found out B. pointed out
C. ruled out D. carried out
18. 【2010四川】In many people’s opinion，that company，though relatively small，is pleasant______.
A. to deal with B. dealing with
C. to be dealt with D. dealt with
19. 【2010湖北】Had he ______ her promise, she would have made it to Yale University.
A. looked up to B. lived up to
C. kept up with D. come up with
20. 【2009山东】Amy joined a painting group but didn’t seem to _______, so she left.
A. show B. go up C. fit in D. come over
21. 【2013浙江】Bears ______ fat stores throughout the summer and fall to have energy enough to last them through (答疑qq 329950885)their winter sleep.
A. pack up B. build up C. bring up D. take up
22. 【2010陕西】You look well. The air and the sea foods in Sanya must _______ you, I suppose.
A. agree with B. agree to
C. agree on D. agree about
考点2. 惯用表达
23. 【2013新课标I】Tony can hardly boil an egg, still ______ cook dinner.
A. less B. little C. much D. more
24. 【2013新课标I】“You can’t judge a book by its cover,” ______.
A. as the saying goes old B. goes as the old saying
C. as the old saying goes D. goes as old the saying
25. 【2013江苏】I am always delighted when I receive an email from you. ______the party on July 1st I shall be pleased to attend.
A. On account of B. In response to
C. In view of D. With regard to
26. 【2013江苏】With inspiration from other food cultures, American food culture can take a ______ for the better.
A. share B. chance C. turn D. lead
27. 【2013福建】Mrs. Smith finds it hard to clear up the mess, as her children are always ______ whenever she tries to.
A. in the way B. on watch
C. in sight D. on the line
28. 【2013陕西】The manager wants to see changes in the company, and I am sure he will ______.
A. in particular B. in turn
C. in charge D. in time
29. 【2013辽宁】______ everyone here, I wish you a pleasant journey back to your country.
A. By means of B. On behalf of
C. In search of D. For fear of
30. 【2010湖北】It is illegal for a public official to ask people for gifts or money ______favors to them.
A. in preference to B. in place of
C. in agreement with D. in exchange for
31. 【2010江西】We give dogs time, space and love we can spare, and _____, dogs give us their all.
A. in all B. in fact C. in short D. in return
32. 【2007湖北】People try to avoid public transportation delays by using their own cars, and this ______ creates further problems.
A. in short B. in case C. in doubt D. in turn
33. 【2011江苏】We’d better discuss everything ______before we work out the plan.
A. in detail B. in general
C. on purpose D. on time
34. 【2011全国I】The form cannot be signed by anyone ______ yourself.
A. rather than B. other than
C. more than D. better than
35. 【2011浙江】The school isn’t the one I really wanted to go to, but I suppose I’ll just have to ______it.
A. make the best of B. get away from
C. keep an eye on D. catch up with
36. 【2011福建】____ good service, the restaurant offers different kinds of traditional Fujian dished.
A. Far from B. Apart from
C. Instead of D. Regardless of
37. 【2007陕西】— I think he is taking an active part in social work.
—I agree with you ______.
A. in a way B. on the way
C. by the way D. in the way



写作专练3. 熟练使用动词短语和惯用表达
(参看P.227)


答案：
第1章 动词短语和其他惯用表达
第1讲 常用动词短语（一）
1. D 2. C 3. A 4. A 5. A
6. C 7. A 8. A 9. A 10. D
11. A 12. C 13. C 14. D 15. B
16. A 17. C 18. A 19. A 20. B
21. C 22. A 23. D 24. C 25. D
26. A 27. A 28. A 29. C 30. A
31. A 32. B 33. D 34. A
第2讲 常用动词短语（二）
1. A 2. D 3. C 4. B 5. C
6. C 7. A 8. A 9. C 10. D
11. B 12. C 13. B 14. D 15. B
16. D 17. B 18. C 19. B 20. D
21. A 22. D 23. C 24. C 25. A
26. B 27. C 28. C 29. D 30. B
31. D 32. C 33. A 34. D
第3讲 其他常考动词短语和惯用表达
1. D 2. D 3. C 4. C 5. D
6. B 7. B 8. C 9. C 10. C
11. B 12. C 13. A 14. B 15. B
16. B 17. C 18. A 19. B 20. C
21. B 22. A 23. A 24. C 25. D
26. C 27. A 28. D 29. B 30. D
31. D 32. D 33. A 34. B 35. A
36. B 37. A





















句子结构及成分


1 相关概念


1.

2. 词性的英文缩写
在英语学习中，掌握单词词性非常重要。如果我们在记单词的时只记拼写、读音而不记词性的话，我们就不知道如何使用它们，所以我们在记单词时一定要把单词词性记准记牢。
缩写字母 原词 代表词性
n. noun 名词
v. verb 动词
vt. transitive verb 及物动词
vi. intransitive verb 不及物动词
modal v. modal verb 情态动词
aux. v. auxiliary verb 助动词
adj. adjective 形容词
adv. adverb 副词
num. numeral 数词
interj. interjection 感叹词
pron. pronoun 代词
prep. preposition 介词
art. article 冠词
conj conjunction 连词
3. 及物动词和不及物动词
实义动词后面跟宾语时，这个动词是及物动词。实义动词后面不跟宾语时，此时这个动词是不及物动词。
The door opened.
(open后面没跟宾语，此时，open是不及物动词。)
He opened the door.
(open后面有宾语the door, 此时，open是及物动词。)
注意：英语中一个动词是及物动词还是不及物动词，关键是看它用在句中时后面是否跟宾语。
有些动词既可作及物动词又可作不及物动词，词义相同。如：
The meeting began at six. < vi.>
We began the meeting at six. < vt.>
有(答疑qq 329950885)些动词既可作及物动词又可作不及物动词，但词义不同。如：
The man walked away. (walk不及物动词，意为“走”)
He walked the dog every day. ( walk及物动词，“遛”)
She washes clothes at home. (wash及物动词，“洗”)
The clothes washes well. (wash不及物动词，“耐洗”)
英语中一些单词是及物还是不及物，可能与汉语不同。
He listens to the music every day. (listen为不及物动词，而汉语中“听”是及物动词。)
指出下列句中斜体动词是及物动词还是不及物动词，及物动词填vt.，不及物填vi.。
考点1. Most birds can fly.（ ）
考点2. The children are flying kites in the park. ( )
考点3. It happened yesterday.（ ）
考点4. My watch stopped.（ ）
考点5. The baby stopped crying when he saw his mother. ( )
考点6. She spoke at the meeting this morning. （ ）
考点7. Shall I begin at once?（ ）
考点8. She began working as a teacher after she left school.（ ）（ ）
考点9. When did they leave Beijing?（ ）
考点10. They left last week. （ ）
4. 实义动词、助动词与情态动词
实义动词和助动词是根据动词在句子中的含义和作用来划分的。实义动词也叫行为动词。
实义动词
指的是那些意义完全且能够独立作谓语的动词。如：
He lives quite near. (live“住”，有明确的意义，单独作谓语，为实义动词。)
I like reading. （like “喜欢”，意思明确，单独作谓语，为实义动词。）
I bought a pen yesterday. （bought “买”，意义明确，单独作谓语，为实义动词。）
助动词
助动词的“助”是“帮助”之意。因此，助动词是指那些用来帮助构成时态、语态、虚拟语气、疑问句、否定句、倒装句和帮助强调的词。这些词本身无词汇意义或意义不完全，不能单独作谓语。
帮助构成时态的：
The boy is crying.(is 用来帮助构成现在进行时，和crying一起作谓语，是助动词。)
He has arrived. (has用来帮助构成现在完成时，和arrived一起作谓语，是助动词。)
I have been painting all day. （have been用来帮助构成现在完成进行时，和painting一起作谓语，都是助动词。）
帮助构成否定句和疑问句的：
Does he like English? (does帮助构成一般疑问句，没有具体意义，是助动词。)
He doesn’t have lunch at home. (does只是帮助构成否定句，没有具体意义，是助动词。)
帮助构成被动语态的
Trees are planted in spring. (are帮助构成被动语态，没有具体意义，是助动词。)
The house has been pulled down. (has been帮助构成时态和语态，是助动词。)
帮助构成虚拟语气
If he had come yesterday, I wouldn’t have made such a mistake.(had, have帮助构成虚拟语气，是助动词，属于谓语的一部分。)
帮助构成倒装句的
So did he love his mother that he bought her many presents on her birthday.
(他如此爱他的母亲以至于他母亲生日那一天，他给她买了许多礼物。did只是帮助构成倒装句，没有具体意义，是助动词。)
帮助构成强调意义的
He did come yesterday. (他昨天确实来过。did起强调作用，没有具体意义，是助动词。)
因此可以看出，常见的助动词为do, be, have，它们为基本助动词。
一个词既可以作实义动词也可以作助动词，具体是哪一种，主要看它们在句中的功能。
He did his homework at seven o’clock.(did单独作谓语，意为“做”，是实义动词。)
Did he do his homework yesterday? (did是助动词，帮助构成一般疑问句，do是实义动词，意为“做”，是实义动词。)
He has had breakfast. (has是助动词，帮助构成现在完成时，(答疑qq 329950885)had是实义动词，意为“吃”。has had一起构成了句子的谓语。)
指出下列斜体单词是实义动词还是助动词。
i. Does ( ) he like ( ) swimming?
ii. He does ( ) like ( ) swimming.
iii. Where does( ) he live ( )?
iv. He does ( ) some washing after work.
v. He has ( ) had ( ) supper already.
vi. The bridge has( ) been( ) built( ) now.
vii. I have ( ) been ( )waiting( ) for you all day.
viii. He was ( ) struck ( ) by a stone.

情态动词
情态动词同助动词一样，不能单独作谓语，要和实义动词一起作谓语。因此，情态动词也称为情态助动词。情态动词同基本助动词的区别在于，基本助动词本身无意义，而情态动词有自己的意义。如：
He can swim across the river.(can的词义为“能够”)
You must stay at home. (must词义为“必须”)
I might leave tomorrow.（might的词义为“或许”）
（具体用法参看P. 128考点1）
5. 谓语和非谓语
在英语中，一个主谓结构中只能有一个谓语，再出现动词时，要变成非谓语形式，即：在前面加to构成动词不定式，或在后面加-ing构成动名词或现在分词，或在后面加-ed构成过去分词。也就是说，非谓语是指：动词不定式、动名词、现在分词和过去分词。
先找出句中的谓语，然后改正句中的错误，并说明原因。
考点1. Get up early is good for our health.
早起有利于我们的身体健康。
考点2. I want go home now. 我现在想回家。
考点3. My favorite sport is play football.
我最喜爱的运动是踢足球。
考点4. There is a bird sings in the tree.
有一只鸟正在树上唱歌。
考点5. The boy sits over there likes singing.
坐在那边的那个男孩喜欢唱歌。
考点6. The house was built last year has been sold out.
去年建的那座房子已经出售了。
考点7. The girls are singing over there are my classmates.
在那边唱歌的那些女孩是我的同学。
考点8. My parents wanted him work hard.
我父母亲想让他努力学习。
考点9. I remember saw him that day.
我记得那天看见过他。
10. I saw him walked into the building.
我看到他跑进那座建筑物。
6. 主动关系和被动关系
先看下面两个题：
1. ______ wonderful, this kind of food enjoyed a good sale.
A. Tasted B. Being tasted
C. Tasting D. Having tasted
2. The food ______ delicious sells well.
A. smells B. smelled
C. smelling D. is smelling
一些同学分别选A和B。他们说，食物是被品尝、被闻的，和食物构成被动关系，所以要用过去分词。
这种说法是错误的。
非谓语中的主动关系和被动关系，不是从谁做了这个动作着眼，而是从恢复成一句话后是“主动语态”还是“被动语态”着眼。
主动关系：
从逻辑关系上看，相当于主动语态。如：The boy crying over there is Tom.(在那边哭的那个男孩) 从逻辑上讲，the boy…cry, 男孩哭，相当于主动语态，是主动关系。
被动关系：
从逻辑关系上看，相当于被动语态。如：The house built (答疑qq 329950885) last year is the strongest.(去年建的那座房子) 从逻辑上讲，the house was built,房子被建，相当于被动语态，是被动关系。
在上两题中，逻辑关系可以表达为：This kind of food tasted wonderful. The food smells delicious. 逻辑上food和taste、smell是一种主谓关系，是主动语态，因此填现在分词。
因此，上两题的答案为C和C。
7. 逻辑上的主谓关系
在判断是否是宾语补足语时，一般说，“宾语和宾语补足语构成逻辑上的主谓关系”。一些同学对这句话不理解。如：
He asked me to lend him some money.他让我借给他一些钱。
“me”是宾语，“me to lend him some money”意为“我借给他一些钱”。从意思上看，这像一句话，“我”是主语，“借给他一些钱”是谓语部分，但在英语原句中，它们却不是真正的主谓关系。因此可以说“逻辑上的主谓关系”，是指，从意思上看像主谓关系，而实际上不是。“to lend him some money”是宾语补足语。
判断下列句中画线部分是否是宾语补足语。(是的填T，不是的填F)
写作专练1. I want him to come at once. ( )
写作专练2. He lent me some money. ( )
写作专练3. He made the boy cry again. ( )
写作专练4. The teacher found him cheating in the exam. ( )
写作专练5. Don’t leave the door open at night. ( )
8. 复合结构
在我们学习语法的过程中，我们可能会听说“复合宾语”、“动名词的复合结构”和“动词不定式的复合结构”。
实际上，这几个“复合”，都有“逻辑上的主谓关系”之意。如：
He invited us to come to the party.
(us是宾语，to come to the party是宾语补足语；宾语和宾语补足语合在一起称为复合宾语。宾语和宾语补足语是逻辑上的主谓关系。)
It’s important for us to learn English well.
(it是形式主语，真正的主语是for us to learn English well。“us”是“to learn English well”的逻辑主语，二者构成了逻辑上的主谓关系。for somebody to do something是动词不定式的复合结构。)
It’s very kind of you to help me.（of you to help me也是动词不定式的复合结构。与for somebody to do something的区别参看P. 83考点1，you和to help me构成了逻辑上的主谓关系。）
Tom’s coming late made our teacher angry.(Tom迟到使我们老师生气。coming是动名词，Tom’s coming late是动名词的复合结构。Tom是coming late的逻辑主语，二者是逻辑上的主谓关系。)
9. 没有人称和数的变化
先看下列三组句中have、do和be的变化形式
I have a book
He has a book.
They have a book.
I enjoy watching TV.
You enjoy watching TV.
We enjoy watching TV.
He is sleeping.
I am sleeping.
They are sleeping.
“人称的变化”是指：谓语动词用什么形式，受前面主语是第几人称的影响。主语同为单数（表示一个人）， be在第一人称I后用am, 在you后用are, 在he后用is; do和have在一、二人称后用原形，在第三人称后用为does, has。
“数”是指“单数和复数”。“数的变化”是指谓语动词用什么形式，还受前面主语是单数还是复数的影响。如果主语是复数，be要用are的形式，do和have用原形。如果主语是第三人称单数，be用is, do和have要用does和has。
情态动词没有人称和数的变化。如：
He / I / We can swim.









2 句子成分




英语的句子成分主要有六种：即主语、谓语、宾语、定语、状语和补语。（可以熟记为：主谓宾，定状补）除了这六种主要成分之外，还有“表语”和“同位语”的说法。但表语和系动词一起作谓语，因此划分成分时，划分在谓语上。同位语分为主语同位语和宾语同位语，属于主语或宾语的一部分。
1. 划分句子成分时的常用符号
英语中划分句子成分的符号
主语 在下面画直线
谓语 在下面画曲线
宾语 在下面画双横线
定语 在下面画虚线?（一行点使我们想到一排钉子，“钉”谐音为“定语”的“定”）
状语 下面为短横线 （短横线使我们想到短木桩，木桩撞（状）钟）
补语 上一短横，下一短横（下一短横好像是为了弥补上面短横间的空隙）
同位语 上下双曲线，（虽都有曲折，上下位置基本相同
2. 主语
主语是一个句子所叙述的主体，一般位于句首，通常由名词性的词来充当。
可以作主语的词性或语法结构：
1.名词 2.代词 3.数词 4.名词化的形容词（如the rich）5.不定式 6.动名词 7.主语从句等表示。
在下面句子的主语下面画横线，并说出由什么充当。
1 During the 1990s, American country music has become more and more popular.
2 We often speak English in class.
3 One-third of the students in this class are girls.
4 To swim in the river is a great pleasure.
5 Smoking does harm to the health.
6 The rich should help the poor.
7 When we are going to have an English test has not been decided.
8 It is necessary to master a foreign language.
That he isn’t at home is not true.
改正下列句中的错误，并说明原因。
He failed the exam is the reason why he dropped out.
That why he was late for school was that his mother was ill.
Beyond the mountains lie a small village.
Gone is the days when I had to go to school on foot.
Play basketball is my favorite sport.
Give up English is not an option.




正确运用主语的各种形式（P. 227)

3. 谓语
谓语由动词充当，说明主语所做的动作或具有的特征和状态。谓语的构成如下：
简单谓语：由一个动词或动词短语构成。如：
He practices running every morning.
He reads newspapers every day.
复合谓语：
由情态动词或其他助动词加动词构成。如：
You may keep the book for two weeks.
He has caught a bad cold.
My sister is crying over there.
I have been waiting for you all the time.
I would stay at home all day.
由系动词加表语构成。系动词不能单独作谓语，要和表语一起作谓语。如：
We are students.
Your idea sounds great.
4. 表语
表语多是形容词，用以说明主语的身份、特征和状态，它一般位于系动词（如be, become, get, look, grow, turn, seem等）(答疑qq 329950885)之后。表语一般由名词、代词、形容词、分词、数词、不定式、动名词、介词短语、副词及表语从句表示。
画出下列句中的表语，并说明由什么充当。
a) Our teacher of English is an American.
b) Is it yours?
c) The weather has turned cold.
d) The speech is exciting.
e) Three times seven is twenty one.
f) His job is to teach English.
g) His hobby（爱好）is playing football.
h) The machine must be under repairs.
i) The truth is that he has never been abroad.
5. 宾语
宾语由名词性的词充当，表示动作的对象或承受者，一般位于及物动词和介词后面。
宾语分为动词宾语和介词宾语，分别构成动宾结构和介词结构。
画出下列句中的宾语, 并说明由什么充当。
They planted many trees yesterday.
(How many dictionaries do you have?) I have five.
They helped the old with their housework yesterday.
I wanted to buy a car.
I enjoy listening to popular music.
I think（that）he is fit for his office.
6. 宾语补足语
英语中有些及物动词，除有一个直接宾语以外，还要有一个宾语补语，才能使句子的意义完整。宾语补足语和(答疑qq 329950885)宾语构成逻辑上的主谓关系。换句话说，在意思上，宾语相当于宾补的主语。
带有宾语补足语的一般句型为：某些及物动词（如make等）+宾语+宾补。宾补可由名词、形容词、副词、不定式、分词、介词短语和从句充当。
用下画线画出下列句中的宾语补足语，并指出是什么词充当，同时体会宾补和宾语之间的逻辑关系。
His father named him Dongming.
They painted their boat white.
Let the fresh air in.
You mustn’t force him to lend his money to you.
We saw her entering the room.
We found everything in the lab in good order.
We will soon make our city what your city is now.
I want your homework done on time.
7. 主补
对主语的补充。含有宾语补足语的句子在变成被动语态，宾语作主语时，原来的宾补就成了主语补足语。
He was elected monitor.
She was found singing in the next room.
He was advised to teach the lazy boy a lesson.
8. 定语
定语是对名词或代词起修饰、限定作用的词、短语或句子，汉语中常用“……的”表示。定语通常位于被修饰的成分前。
在英语中，许多情况下，定语是放在所修饰词后面的，这点与汉语习惯不同，也是许多同学不能读懂长句的主要原因。
a) 副词用作定语一般要后置。
People there are very friendly. (那儿的人们)
He didn’t like the man downstairs. （楼下的那个人）
b) 形容词短语作定语一般放在所修饰词之后。
单个形容词作定语一般放在所修饰词之前，而形容词短语作定语一般放在所修饰词之后。
The next man is a scientist.
The man next to me is a scientist.
（我旁边的那个人）
c) 介词短语作定语时要后置。
The boy under the tree is Tom.（树下的那个男孩）
The tallest boy in our class is John.（我们班最高的那个男孩）
d) 现在分词短语、过去分词短语、动词不定式作定语常后置。
I have something to say. (直译：我有要说的话)
The boy crying over there is my classmate.（在那边哭的那个男孩）
The house built last year is impressive.（去年建的那座房子）
口头翻译下列句子，用下画线标出定语部分，留意定语的位置，并说明定语是由什么词性或结构充当。
1 The letter on the desk is for Mr. Wu.
2 The woman with a baby in her arms is his mother.
3 We need a place twice larger than this one.
4 She carried a basket full of eggs.
5 It’s a book worth no more than one dollar.
6 It’s a city far from the coast.
7 He has money enough to buy a car.
8 The man downstairs was trying to sleep.
9 There are lots of places of interest needing repairing in our city.
10 Tigers belonging to meat-eating animals feed on meat.
11 A boy calling himself John wanted to see you.
12 He picked up a wallet lying on the ground on the way back home.
13 There are many clothes to be washed.
14 Most of the singers invited to the party were from America.
15 Then the great day came when he was to march past the palace in the team.



用活形容词短语作后置定语（P. 228）

9. 状语
修饰动词、形容词、副词或整个句子, 说明动作或状态特征的句子成分，叫作状语。
He writes carefully. He walks slowly.
(认真地写，慢慢地走，修饰动词用副词，作状语)
This material is environmentally friendly.
（修饰形容词用副词，作状语）
He runs very slowly.
（修饰副词slowly, 因此very是副词，作状语）
Unfortunately, he lost all of his money.
（修饰整个句子用副词，作状语）
几个并列状语的先后顺序：方式→地点→时间
一个句中有几个并列状语时，其顺序较灵活，但一般是：方式→地点→时间。如：
He worked hard at his lessons last year.
I found a lost pen outside our school yesterday morning.
He was walking slowly outside the park at that moment.



正确安排并列状语的顺序（P. 228）

频度副词often, always, usually, sometimes, never等在句中的位置
位于情态动词、系动词、助动词之后, 实义动词之前。
You can never tell what he will do.
He is often late.
He is always helping others.
He often came late.



注意频度副词的位置（P. 228）
状语按意义分类
在句子成分中，主语、谓语、宾语、定语、表语、补语都比较好辨认，如果这几个成分都不是，那很可能就是状语了。因此，状语的种类很多，可以表示时间、地点、原因、目的、结果、程度、条件、方式和让步等。
指出下列画线部分属于什么状语。
I. How about meeting again at six?
II. Mr. Smith lives on the third floor.
III. Last night she didn’t go to the dance party because
of the rain.
IV. She put the eggs into the basket with great care.
V. She came in with a dictionary in her hand.
VI. In order to catch up with the others, I must work
harder.
VII. To make his dream come true, Tom becomes very
interested in business.
VIII. The boy needs a pen very much.
IX. The boy really needs a pen.
10. He was so tired that he fell asleep immediately.
11. She works very hard though she is old.
12. I am taller than he is.
13. I shall go there if it doesn’t rain.
14. On Sundays, there is no student in the classroom.
15. Having to finish his homework, the boy needs a
pen.
10. 同位语
同位语是在名词或代词之后并列名词或代词对前者加以说明的成分，近乎于后置定语。如：
We students should study hard. / (students是we的同位语，都是指同一批“学生”）
It’s good to us students.
选择正确答案，并口头说出句中那个是同位语。
The young man, ______,works in the office.
A. me brother B. my brother C. my brothers D. me
Our English teacher, ______, often helps us with study.
A. Mrs. Wang B. Mrs. Wangs
C. Mrs. Wang’s. D. of him
______, some railway workers, are busy repairing the train.
A. Them B. He C. They D. Theirs





3
4 简单句的五种基本结构




英语句子的基本结构可以归纳成五种基本句型及其扩大、组合、省略或倒装。掌握这五种基本句型，是掌握各种英语句子结构的基础。
英语五种基本句型结构如下：


主语 谓语



用符号表示为：
① Ｓ Ｖ （主＋谓）
② Ｓ Ｖ Ｏ （主＋谓＋宾）
③ Ｓ Ｖ ｏ Ｏ （主＋谓＋间宾＋直宾）
④ Ｓ Ｖ Ｏ Ｃ （主＋谓＋宾＋宾补）
⑤ Ｓ Ｖ Ｐ （主＋系＋表）
主语（subject） 谓语（predicate）
宾语（object） 定语（attribute）
状语 (adverbial) 补语（complement）
表语（predicative）
基本句型一：Ｓ Ｖ （主＋谓）
这类句子的谓语动词都是不及物动词，都不带宾语，但可以带状语。如:
It is raining now. (Ｓ Ｖ)
We’ve worked for 5 hours. (Ｓ Ｖ)
The meeting lasted half an hour. (Ｓ Ｖ)
Time flies. (Ｓ Ｖ)
分析下列句子成分，并在后面括号内标明属于五种基本句型中的哪一种。
1. Dark clouds hung overhead. ( )
2. Gradually a smile appeared on her face. ( )
3. He is smiling all over his face. ( )
4. I did well in English. ( )
5. He talked loudly in the classroom yesterday. ( )
基本句型二： Ｓ Ｖ Ｐ （主＋系＋表）
系动词主要是be，但还有一些动词有些时候也可作系动词，有人称之为半系动词。
如何辨别系动词
有些动词既可作连系动词，又可以作实义动词。(答疑qq 329950885)如何来辨别呢？有一个最简便的方法，即用连系动词be替换句子中的这些动词，句子仍然成立就是连系动词；反之，不能替换的，就是行为动词。如：
1 She looks beautiful. (looks变为is之后，她是美丽的，句意没有大的变化，looks是系动词。)
Look at the picture.(look不能换为be, look为实义动词。)
2 He felt the book with his right hand.(feel是“摸”的意思，不能换为was, 是实义动词。)
The silk feels soft.(这种丝绸摸起来很柔软，feels换为is之后，句意变化不大，因此是系动词。)
辨别下列斜体动词是系动词还是实义动词。
1 The door stays open at night.
2 He tasted the food, and the food tasted delicious.
3 The book still lies open on the desk.
4 What he said proved true.
5 He can’t proved his theory(理论).
常见的系动词
状态系动词
用来表示主语状态，只有be一词。如：
He is a teacher. 他是一名教师。
持续系动词
用来表示主语继续或保持一种状况或态度，主要有keep, remain, stay, lie, stand。如：
He kept silent at the meeting. 他开会时保持沉默。
This matter remains a mystery. 此事仍是一个谜。
The food stays fresh in the fridge.
食物在冰箱里仍然很新鲜。
The house stood empty for years.房子空了数年。
He lies awake in bed.他躺在床上，醒着。
表“像”系动词
用来表示“看起来像”这一概念，主要有seem, appear, look。如：
Something seems wrong. 好像出差错了。
He appears young. 他看起来很年轻。
感官系动词
感官系动词主要有look“看起来”，feel“摸起来”, smell“闻起来”, sound“听起来”, taste“尝起来”。
This kind of cloth feels very soft.
这种布手感很软。
This flower smells very sweet.
这朵花闻起来很香。
变化系动词
这些系动词表示主语变成什么样。变化系动词主要有become, grow, turn, fall, get, go, come, run。
He became mad after that. 自那之后，他疯了。
She grew rich within a short time.
她没多长时间就富了。
He fell ill yesterday.他昨天病了。
Eggs go bad easily in summer. 蛋夏天容易变坏。
His face went red.他的脸变红了。
What he had dreamt of came true.
他的梦想实现了。
Still waters run deep.静水流深。
终止系动词
表示主语已终止动作，主要有prove, turn out, 表达“证实”，“变成”之意。如：
The rumor proved false. 这谣言证实有假。
His plan turned out a success.
他的计划终于成功了。（turn out表终止性结果）
What he predicted turned out (to be) wrong.
他预言的结果是错的。
用下画线画出下列句中的系动词。
1. His advice proved right.
2. The shop stays open till 8 o’clock.
3. The machine went wrong.
4. All these efforts seem in vain.
5. These words sound reasonable.
6. The room soon became crowded.
7. The days are getting longer and longer.
8. He fell ill yesterday.
9. Trees turn green in spring.
10. What you said sounds great.
系动词不能单独作谓语，要和表语一起作谓语
He is a student. (Ｓ Ｖ Ｐ)
Your idea sounds great. (Ｓ Ｖ Ｐ)
在一个英语单句中，一般情况要有谓语动词
要注意：介词短语和形容词不能单独作谓语，要和系动词一起作谓语。
改错：
①Our school very beautiful and we like it very much.
②Your book on the desk.
答案及解析：
Our school is very beautiful and we like it very much. (句中没有谓语动词)
Your book is on the desk.（句中没有谓语动词）



不要忘了使用系动词（P. 228）
基本句型三： Ｓ Ｖ Ｏ （主＋谓＋宾）
此结构是由“主语+及物动词（词组）+宾语”构成。如：
She likes English.
We planted a lot of trees on the farm yesterday.
用下画线画出下列句中的宾语。
练习1. People all over the world speak English.
练习2. Jim cannot dress himself.
练习3. All of us believe that Jack is an honest boy.
练习4. He did not know what to say.
练习5. He just wanted to stay at home.
练习6. He practices speaking English every day.
基本句型四： Ｓ Ｖ ｏ Ｏ （主＋谓＋间宾 ＋直宾）
有些及物动词可以有两个宾语，如：give“给”，pass“递”，bring“带”，show“显示”。这两个宾语通常一个指人，为间接宾语；一个指物，为直接宾语。间接宾语一般位于直接宾语之前。
一般的顺序为：动词 + 间接宾语 + 直接宾语。
如：He gave me a cup of tea. (Ｓ Ｖ ｏ Ｏ)
强调间接宾语顺序为：
动词 + 直接宾语 + 介词 + 间接宾语。如：
Show this house to Mr. Smith.
若直接宾语为人称代词：动词 + 代词直接宾语 + 介词 + 间接宾语。如：
Bring it to me, please. (不能说 Bring me it, please.)
常跟双宾语的及物动词有：
（需借助to的）allow, bring, deny, give, grant, hand, leave, lend, offer, owe, pass, pay, permit, promise, read, refuse, sell, send, show, teach, tell, wish, write等。
（需借助for 的） buy, choose, fetch, get, make, order, paint, play(演奏), save, sing, spare等。
一般用to多些，用for的记住常用的三个就行：get, buy, make。
He sent me an English-Chinese Dictionary.
= He sent an English-Chinese Dictionary to me.
She bought John a book. = She bought a book for John.
分析下列句子成分，口头说出间接宾语和直接宾语。
She ordered herself a new dress.
She cooked her husband a delicious meal.
He brought you a dictionary.
He denies her nothing.
I showed him my pictures.
I gave my car a wash.
I told him that the bus was late.
He showed me how to run the machine.



用活双宾语句式（P. 228）

基本句型五：ＳＶＯＣ （主＋谓＋宾＋宾补）
此句型的句子特点是：动词虽然是及物动词，但是只跟一个宾语还不能表达完整的意思，必须加上一个补充成分来补足宾语，才能使意思完整。
宾语补足语：位于宾语之后对宾语做出说明的成分。(答疑qq 329950885)宾语与其补足语有逻辑上的主谓关系，它们一起构成复合宾语。
The war made him a soldier.（ＳＶＯＣ“他成为一个士兵”，构成逻辑上的主谓关系）
New methods make the job easy. （ＳＶＯＣ）
I often find him at work. （ＳＶＯＣ）
The teacher asked the students to close the windows. （ＳＶＯＣ）
I saw a cat running across the road.
分析下列句子并划分成分，在后面的括号内标明是什么充当句子的宾语补足语。
1. They appointed him manager. （ ）
2. They painted the door green. （ ）
3. He pushed the door open. （ ）
4. They found the house deserted. （ ）
5. What makes him think so? （ ）
6. We saw him out. （ ）
7. He asked me to come back soon. （ ）
8. I saw them getting on the bus. （ ）
9. We all think it a pity that she didn’t come here. （ ）
10. I’ll have my bike repaired. （ ）
11. We elected him monitor. （ ）
12. Don’t keep the lights burning. （ ）
there be 句型
此句型是由“there + be + 主语 + 状语”构成，用以表达“存在有”。它其实是倒装的一种情况，主语位于谓语动词 be 之后，there 仅为引导词（也有看作形式主语的），并无实际意义。
be 与其后的主语在人称和数上一致，有时态和数的变化。
现在时?? there is / are …???
过去时?? there was / were…
将来时?? there will be…/there is / are going to be...
完成时? there has / have been…
可能有? there might be...??
肯定有? there must be …/ there must have been...
过去曾经有? there used to be …?
似乎有? there seem / seems / seemed to be …
碰巧有? there happen / happens / happened to be …　
可用 live, stand, come, go, lie, remain, exist, arrive等词代替be动词。
此时还表示存在有，但表意要更具体一些。如：
There lived an old man at the foot of the mountain.
There came a shout for “help”.
There exists no air on the moon.
There lies a book on the desk.
There stands a tree on the hill.
______ a certain doubt among the students as to the necessity of the work.
A. It existed B. There existed
C. They had D. There had
______ a beautiful palace ______ the foot of the hill.
A. There stand; at
B. There stands; under
C. Stands there; under
D. There stands; at
答案：B, D
there be 与have 的区别
there be …“某地有某物，某时有某事”；have 表示“某人拥有某物”。
改错：
There has a book on the desk.
There will have a meeting this evening.
答案：①把has改为is; ②把have改为be。
提示：没有there have这种表示“有”的方法。
双重谓语(仅供了解)
典型例句：
He left this morning very gay.
She left a shy girl and returned a young mother.
分析：双重谓语的基本形式是：行为动词+表语，后面的名(答疑qq 329950885)词或形容词说明主语从事该行为时所处的状态。用作双重谓语的动词多为那些表示位置移动变化的行为动词。如：return，leave， go，come，arrive，start等。
句①意为：上午离开时，他很开心。
句②意为：她离开时还是一个害羞的女孩，回来时却是一位年轻的母亲。


正确运用两个“有”there be与have
(P. 228 )





5 简单句、并列句和复合句




句子按结构可分为简单句、并列句和复合句。
简单句
只有一个主语(或并列主语)和一个谓语(或并列谓语)。如：
He often reads English in the morning.
Tom and Mike are American boys.
She likes drawing and often draws pictures for the wall newspapers.
（画线部分为并列谓语，只有一个主语，仍为简单句。）
并列句（参看P. 186第3讲）
由并列连词（and, but, or等）或分号（;）把两个或两个以上的简单句连在一起构成。要注意, 逗号是不可以连接句子的，这一点和汉语不同。如：
You help him and he helps you.
The future is bright; the road is tortuous.
前途是光明的，道路是曲折的。
表示连接两个同等概念，常用and, not only…but also…, neither…nor…, then等连接。
The teacher’s name is Smith, and the student’s name is John.
He not only stole my money, but he also took my watch away.
表示选择，常用的连词有or, either…or…, otherwise等。
Hurry up, or you’ll miss the train.
表示转折，常用的连词有but, still, however, yet, while, when等。
He was a little man with thick glasses, but he had a strange way of making his classes lively and interesting.
表示因果关系，常用的连词有so, for, therefore等。
August is the time of the year for rice harvest, so every day I work from dawn until dark.
复合句
复合句含有两个或两个以上主谓结构，其中一个主谓结构作另一个的成分。（而并列句的两个主谓结构间是并列关系， 而不是从属关系。）
当简单句的一个成分从词或词组变为句子时，整个句子就成为复合句了。
I. It is wrong. （只有一个主谓结构，是简单句。）
What he said is wrong.
（what he said,是一个主谓结构，he为主语，said为谓语，what是宾语。What he said is wrong. 是另外一个主谓结构，What he said作主语，是主语从句；is wrong系表结构作谓语。因此，本句是复合句。）
II. The boy over there is my brother. （只有一个主谓结构，是简单句。）
The boy who is wearing a hat is my brother.
（The boy over there is my brother.只有一个主谓结构，是简单句。当over there变为 who is wearing a hat时（也是一个主谓结构），整个句子就变成了复合句，who is wearing a hat是定语从句。）
III. I was doing my homework at six. （只有一个主谓结构，是简单句。）
I was doing my homework when he came in.
（I was doing my homework是一个主谓结构，he came in也是一个主谓结构。后面一个主谓结构作前一个的时间状语，是时间状语从句。因此本句是复合句。）
从上面这几个句子，我们可以看出：
一个句子如果含有从句，如名词性从句（主语从句、宾语从句、表语从句和同位语从句）、定语从句和状语从句等，这个句子就是复合句。
复合句的从句和主句之间要用连接词连接。
在上面句1中，what是连接词；在句2中，关系代词who就是连接词；在句3中，when起连接作用。
判断下列句子是简单句、并列句还是复合句。
We often study Chinese history on Friday afternoon.
The boy who offered me his seat is called Tom.
There is a chair in this room, isn’t there?
My brother and I go to school at half past seven in the morning and come back home at seven in the evening.
He is in Class One and I am in Class Two.
He was fond of drawing when he was yet a child.
Neither has he changed his mind, nor will he do so.
What he said at the meeting is very important, isn’t it?
The farmer is showing the boy how to plant a tree.
Both Tom and Jack enjoy country music.
Right now it is the summer vacation and I’m helping my Dad on the farm.
It is the time of year for the rice harvest, so every day I work from dawn until dark.
Sometimes we go on working after dark by the lights of our tractors.
We grow rice in the south of the States, but in the north where it is colder they grow wheat.
Although the farm is large, my Dad has only two men working for him.
引导的是什么从句，不仅要根据连词，还要根据句子结构和句意来判别
说出下列复合句中，where引导的是什么从句。
You can find it where you left it.（ ）
Tell me the address where he lives.（ ）
I don’t know where he comes from.（ ）
Where he was born is not known yet.（ ）
This place is where they once lived.（ ）
一个句子有两个主谓结构时，要考虑它们之间的连接问题
一个句子如果出现两个主谓结构，那它就不是简单句了，要么是并列句，(答疑qq 329950885)要么是复合句。这时我们就要考虑连接词的问题。直接用逗号连接的两个简单句是错误的。这时，我们有四种方法来改正这个错句：
改为并列句：我们可以使用and, so, but等并列连词来把它们连接起来。
改为复合句：加上从属连词，把其中的一个分句改为状语从句、定语从句或名词性从句。
改为简单句：把其中的一个主谓结构的谓语破坏掉，从而使其变成独立主格结构。（参看P. 81）
改标点：把逗号改为分号（根据句意有时也可用冒号、破折号等）。
I like English, my English is very good. ×
I like English and my English is very good. √（并列句）
As I like English, my English is very good. √（含有原因状语从句的复合句）
I like English; my English is good. √（用分号）
I liking English, my English is very good. √ (把一个分句改为独立主格结构)
I have a house, its windows are very big. ×
I have a house and its windows are very big. √ (并列句)
I have a house, whose windows are very big. √ (含有定语从句的复合句)
I have a house; its windows are big. √ (用分号)
I have a house, its windows very big. √ (后面为独立主格结构)
利用英语句子结构规律做下列各题。
Five people won the “China’s green figure” award, a title ______ to ordinary people for their contributions to environmental protection.
A. is given B. was given
C. being given D. given
All the preparations for the task ______, and we’re ready to start.
A. completed B. complete
C. had been completed D. have been completed
【2006辽宁】I was told that there were about 50 foreign students ______ Chinese in the school, most ______ were from Germany.?
A. study; of whom B. study; of them???
C. studying; of them D. studying; of? whom??
Everywhere you can see people in their holiday dress, ______ with smiles.
A. their faces are shining
B. whose faces shining
C. their faces shining
D. faces shining whose
Many students ______ around, I explained the story into details.
A. stood B. standing
C. to stand D. were standing
I have five friends, some of ______ are businessmen.
A. that B. whom C. they D. them
I have five friends, but none of ______ are business- men.
A. that B. whom C. they D. them
【2013上海】________ at the photos, illustrations, title and headings and you can guess what the reading is about.
A. To look B. Looking
C. Having looked D. Look




答案：


句子结构及成分
相关概念
指出下列句中画线动词是及物动词还是不及物动词，及物动词填vt.，不及物填vi.。
1.vi. 2. vt. 3. vi. 4. vi. 5. vt.
6. vi. 7. vi. 8. vt.；vt. 9. vt. 10. vi.
指出下列斜体单词是实义动词还是助动词。
1. 助动词 实义动词 2. 助动词 实义动词
3. 助动词 实义动词 4. 实义动词
5. 助动词 实义动词
6. 助动词 助动词 实义动词
7. 助动词 助动词 实义动词
8. 助动词 实义动词
先找出句中的谓语，然后改正句中的错误，并说明原因。
is是系动词，属于谓语部分；get up early在句中作主语，要用成非谓语形式；作主语一般用动名词，因此把get变为动名词getting。
want在句中作谓语；go home作宾语，而want后面常跟不定式作宾语，因此在go前面加to。
is是系动词，后面跟表语，把play变为playing构成动名词来作表语。
is为谓语动词，sings in the tree实际上是作bird的定语，bird和sing构成主动关系，用现在分词作定语，因此，把sings改为现在分词singing。
likes是谓语动词，“坐在那边”作后置定语，“男孩”和“坐”构成主动关系，因此用现在分词作定语，把sits改为sitting。
谓语为has been sold out；“去年建的”作“The house”的定语，两者构成被动关系，用过去分词作后置定语，因此，把was去掉。
are是句中的谓语部分，“singing over there”作the girls的后置定语，去掉are。
wanted是谓语；work hard作wanted的宾语补足语，want后面通常跟不定式作宾补，因此在work前面加to。
remember是谓语；remember用在“记得以前曾经发生的事”时，后面通常跟动名词作宾语，因此，把saw改为seeing。
10. saw是谓语，(答疑qq 329950885) “走进那座建筑”是作saw的宾语补足语；看到某人做了某事，常用see somebody do something, 因此，把walked改为walk。
判断下列句中画线部分是否是宾语补足语。
1. T 2. F 3. T 4. T 5. T
句子成分
在下面句子的主语下面画横线，并说出由什么充当。
During the 1990s, American country music has become more and more popular.（名词）
We often speak English in class.（代词）
One-third of the students in this class are girls.（数词）
To swim in the river is a great pleasure.（不定式）
Smoking does harm to the health.（动名词）
The rich should help the poor.（名词化的形容词）
When we are going to have an English test has not been decided.（主语从句）
It is necessary to master a foreign language.（it作形式主语，真正的主语为后面的不定式）
That he isn’t at home is not true. (主语从句， that不能省略)
改正下列句中的错误，并说明原因。
在句首加that；因为引导主语从句的that不能省略。(他考试不及格是他辍学的原因。)
把句首的that去掉，因为why除去作主句的成分之外，还起着连接作用。
把lie改为lies； 介词短语不能作主语，主语是后面的a small village。
把is改为are；句子的主语是the days。
Play改为Playing；在这里指经常打篮球，要用动名词作主语。
Give改为To give；在做决定时，放弃英语不是一个选择。give up指具体的某一次。
精品-高中英语语法通霸-6.英语句子成分和结构讲解分析划分与练习及答案.doc
画出下列句中的表语，并说明由什么充当。
Our teacher of English is an American.（名词）
Is it yours?（代词）
The weather has turned cold.（形容词）
The speech is exciting.（分词/形容词，这样的分词已形容词化了）
Three times seven is twenty one.（数词）
His job is to teach English.（不定式）
His hobby（爱好）is playing football.（动名词）
The machine must be under repairs.（介词短语）
The truth is that he has never been abroad.（从句）
画出下列句中的宾语, 并说明由什么充当。
They planed many trees yesterday.（名词）
(How many dictionaries do you have?) I have five.（数词）
They helped the old with their housework yesterday.（名词化形容词）
I wanted to buy a car.（不定式短语）
I enjoy listening to popular music.（动名词短语）
I think（that）he is fit for his office.（宾语从句）
用下画线画出下列句中的宾语补足语，并指出是什么词充当。
His father named him Dongming.（名词）
They painted their boat white.（形容词）
Let the fresh air in.（副词）
You mustn’t force him to lend his money to you.（不定式短语）
We saw her entering the room.（现在分词）
We found everything in the lab in good order.（介词短语）
We will soon make our city what your city is now.（从句）
I want your homework done on time.(过去分词短语)
口头翻译下列句子，用下画线标出定语部分，留意定语的位置，并说明定语是由什么词性或结构充当。
The letter on the desk is for Mr. Wu.
桌子上的那封信是给吴先生的。（介词短语作后置定语）
The woman with a baby in her arms is his mother .
怀里抱婴儿的那个妇女是他的母亲。（with的复合结构作后置定语）
We need a place twice larger than this one.
我们需要一个比这个地方大两倍的地方。（形容词短语作后置定语）
She carried a basket full of eggs.
她提着一个装满鸡蛋的篮子。（形容词短语作后置定语）
It’s a book worth no more than one dollar.
那是一本仅值一美元的书。（形容词短语作后置定语）
It’s a city far from the coast.
它是一座距海岸线很远的城市。（形容词短语作后置定语）
He has money enough to buy a car.
他有足够能买一辆车的钱。（形容词短语作后置定语）
The man downstairs was trying to sleep.
楼下的那个人正在尽力睡觉。（副词作后置定语）
There are lots of places of interest needing repairing in our city.
在我们城市有许多需要维修的名胜。（现在分词短语作后置定语）
Tigers belonging to meat-eating animals feed on meat.
属于食肉动物的老虎以肉为食。（现在分词短语作后置定语）
A boy calling himself John wanted to see you.
一个自称为John的男孩想见你。（现在分词短语作后置定语）
He picked up a wallet lying on the ground on the way back home.
在回家的路上，他捡起一个躺在路上的钱包。（现在分词短语作后置定语）
There are many clothes to be washed.
有许多(答疑qq 329950885)要洗的衣服。意译为：有许多衣服要洗。（动词不定式短语作后置定语）
Most of the singers invited to the party were from America.
大多数被邀请参加派对的歌手都来自美国。（过去分词短语作后置定语）
Then the great day came when he was to march past the palace in the team.
接着，他要列队游行经过宫殿的那一天到了。（定语从句修饰the great day）
指出下列画线部分属于什么状语。
1. 时间状语 2. 地点状语 3. 原因状语
4. 方式状语 5. 伴随状语 6. 目的状语
7. 目的状语 8. 程度状语 9. 程度状语
10. 结果状语 11. 让步状语 12. 比较状语
13. 条件状语 14. 时间状语；地点状语
15. 原因状语
选择正确答案，并说出句中那个是同位语。
1. B 2. A 3. C
简单句的五种基本结构
分析下列句子成分，并在后面括号内标明属于五种基本句型中的哪一种。
Dark clouds hung overhead.(SV)
Gradually a smile appeared on her face. (SV)
He is smiling all over his face. (SV)
I did well in English. (SV)
He talked loudly in the classroom yesterday. (SV)
辨别下列斜体动词是系动词还是实义动词。
1.系动词 2. 实义动词；连系动词 3.连系动词 4. 连系动词 5.实义动词
用下画线画出下列句中的系动词。
His advice proved right.
The shop stays open till 8 o’clock.
The machine went wrong.
All these efforts seem in vain.
These words sound reasonable.
The room soon became crowded.
The days are getting longer and longer.
He fell ill yesterday.
Trees turn green in spring.
What you said sounds great.
用下画线画出下列句中的宾语。
People all over the world speak English.
Jim cannot dress himself.
All of us believe that Jack is an honest boy.
He did not know what to say.
He just wanted to stay at home.
He practices speaking English every day.
分析下列句子成分，口头说出间接宾语和直接宾语。
1. She ordered herself a new dress.
2. She cooked her husband a delicious meal.
3. He brought you a dictionary.
4. He denies her nothing.
5. I showed him my pictures.
6. I gave my car a wash.
7. I told him that the bus was late.
8. He showed me how to run the machine.
分析下列句子并划分成分，在后面的括号内标明是什么充当句子的宾语补足语。
1. They appointed him manager. （名词）
2. They painted the door green. （形容词）
3. He pushed the door open. （形容词）
4. They found the house deserted. （形容词）
5. What makes him think so? （省略to的不定式）
6. We saw him out. （副词）
7. He asked me to come back soon. （动词不定式）
8. I saw them getting on the bus. （现在分词 ）
9. We all think it a pity that she didn’t come here.（名词）
10. I’ll have my bike repaired. （过去分词 ）
11. We elected him monitor. （名词 ）
12. Don’t keep the lights burning. （现在分词）
简单句、并列句和复合句
判断下列句子是简单句、并列句还是复合句。
简单句。
复合句, The boy is called Tom是一个主谓结构，who offered me his seat也是一个主谓结构，为定语从句，作前一个主谓结构中主语the boy 的定语。
简单句，反义疑问句。
简单句，my brother and I 是并列主语，后面go to school和come back为并列谓语，因此也只有一个主谓结构。
并列句。
含有时间状语从句的复合句。
并列句。
复合句，what he said也是一个主谓结构，名词性从句作主语。
简单句，只有一个主谓结构。
简单句，前面为并列主语。
and连接的并列句。
由so连接的并列句。
简单句。
but连接前后为并列句，但后(答疑qq 329950885)面又是一个含有定语从句的复合句。
含有让步状语从句的复合句。
说出下列复合句中，where引导的是什么从句。
地点状语从句
定语从句
宾语从句
主语从句
表语从句
利用英语句子结构规律做下列各题。
1. D 2. D 3. D 4. C 5. B 6. B 7. D 8. D

























1





第七章 定语从句

相关概念




主句、从句、关系词
例句：This is the boy who won the first prize in the English Speech Competition.
主句：在含有定语从句的复合句中，除去定语从句后的部分，是句子的主句。 (例句中，This is the boy.是主句。)
定语从句：相当于形容词，修饰主句中的一个名词或代词（有时修饰整个主句，相当于主句的一个定语。） (例句中，who won the first prize in the English Speech Competition是定语从句，修饰the boy。)
先行词：先行词就是被定语从句修饰的名词等，它总是出现在定语从句的前面。 (例句中，the boy是先行词。)
关系词：关系词指用来引导定语从句的词，分为关系代词和关系副词。(例句中，who是关系代词。)
关系词的三个作用
作定语从句的一个句子成分。
起着连接主句和从句的作用（参看P. 63考点5）。
代指被修饰的先行词。（例句中，who作定语从句的主语，同时起着连接作用，在意思上，指代的是前面的先行词the boy。）
关系代词
指人时可以用who, 也可用that。
Do you know the boy who/that is my desk mate?
The man who/that was killed in the accident is Tom’s uncle.
指物时可以用which, 也可用that。
I like visiting places which/that are not far away.
How do you like the film which/that was shown last Sunday.
whose可以指人也可以指物。
He was a painter whose pictures were not well- known in his life time.
The tree whose leaves are red was planted last year.
关系代词作宾语时可以省略。
I like the meal that/which / ( ) we had last night.
Do you know the boy who/whom/that/( ) we talked about just now?
注：（）表示关系代词省略
关系副词
关系副词在从句中只能作状语。when 指时间，where指地点，why指原因，how不能作关系词。如：
We will put off the picnic until next week when the weather may be better.
He has reached the point where a change is needed.
That is no reason why you should leave.
This is the way how I did it. (how不能作关系词)
基础过关
1. 用合适的关系词完成句子。
The man ______ /______ was here yesterday is a painter.
The man ______ /______ /______ /______ I saw is called Smith.
A child ______ parents are dead is called an orphan.
I’d like a room ______ window looks out over the sea.
A letter ______ /______ is written in pencil is hard to read.
The letter ______ / ______ /______ I received from him yesterday is very important.
That is the boy ______ / ______ / ______ / ______ you are looking for.
Do you know the reason ______ he was late for the meeting？
This is the school ______ I used to study.
I still remember the day ______ we met for the first time.
2. 用符号标出下列句子的主句、定语从句、先行词和关系词。
主句：______ 定语从句:（ ）
先行词：先行词 关系词：
例：This is the book (that I have been looking for).
The movie that we saw last night is very exciting.
Have you bought the book which we talked about？
I still remember the day which we spent together last week.
He still lives in the house whose windows face south.
The boy whose father is a policeman speaks English most fluently in our class.
The girl who you met was John’s sister.
There is no reason why we shouldn’t be friends.
They arrived in the early morning when the sky was still dark.
The days were gone when we had to travel on horses.
Is this the hospital where you were born?






关系词的选择




选用哪个关系词，关键是看关系词在定语从句中作什么成分
含有定语从句的复合句可以分为两部分：主句和从句。关系词是定语从句的一个成分。
选用关系词，要看关系词在定语从句中作什么成分，而不是看先行词是什么词性。
He worked in the factory which produces TV sets.
He worked in the factory where his father had worked.
I like the school which is near to my home.
I like the school where my sister studies.
在句1和句2中，先行词前都有in, 但关系词有用which也有用where的；
在句3和句4中，先行词都是the school, 但关系词有用which也有用where的。
因此，我们可以看出，对关系词起决定性作用的并不是先行词。
在句1和句3中，关系词在定语从句中都是作主语，因此用的都是关系代词which；
在句2和句4中，关系词在定语从句中都是作状语，因此都是用关系副词where。
我们可以看出，用哪个关系词，主要看关系词在定语从句中作什么成分。
选用关系词的方法：一“找”二“还”三“替换”
找：就是找出主句、从句、先行词和关系词。（参看本章第1讲）
还：根据先行词提示的意思，大胆地把定语从句还原(答疑qq 329950885)为完整的一句话。（可以添词）
替换：用关系词替换定语从句中还原后添加的部分，作主语和宾语用关系代词，作状语用关系副词。（时间状语用when，地点状语用where, 原因状语用why）（同初中时做的“对画线部分提问”相似，该用what的时候用which/that即可）
例如：
This is the school ______ I once studied.
This is the school ______ is the most famous in the city.
I am studying at a school ______ my father teaches English.
找：（略）
还原：根据先行词的提示，这三句话的定语从句还原成完整的一句话后分别为：
I once studied at the school.
The school is the most famous in the city.
My father teaches English at the school.
粗斜体部分为根据先行词的意思把关系词还原后的部分。
替换：根据 “对画线部分提问”的规则，1.和3.用where, 2.本该用what, 在定语从句中该用what的要换为which/that。
因此，答案为：1.where；2. that/which；3. where
关系词一般要位于定语从句的句首
【2009江西】The house I grew up ______ has been taken down and replaced by an office building.
A. in it B. in C. in that D. in which
答案与分析：A没有关系词，不能连接两句话；C介词后不能用that；D关系词一般不位于句末；而B可以看作是关系代词作宾语、放在句首并且省略了。因此选B。
利用一“找”二“还”三“替换”的方法选择关系词
Is this the reason ______ he explained at the meeting for his carelessness in his work?
A. that B. what C. how D. why
Is this the reason ______ he was so careless in his work?
A. that B. what C. how D. why
The reason ______ he didn’t come was ______ he was ill.
A. why; that B. that; why
C. for that; that D. for which; what
He lives in a village ______ is not far from the city.
A. which B. where C. what D. whose
He lives in the village ______ he was born.
A. which B. where
C. what D. whose
In an hour, we travel to places ______ could have taken our ancestors days to reach.
A. where B. when
C. which D. what
In an hour, we travel to places ______ we can relax and get refreshed.
A. where B. when
C. which D. what
The place ______ interested me most was the Children’s Palace.
A. which B. where
C. what D. in which
The place ______ he had a good time last Sunday was the Children’s Palace.
A. which B. where
C. what D. in where
I’ll never forget the days ______ we studied together.
A. that B. / C. when D. A and B
I’ll never forget the days ______ we spent together.
A. that B. / C. when D. A and B
If we want to have a bright future, we must learn to act in ways ______ do not do harm to other living things.
A. in which B. / C. how D. that
Is this the factory ______ color TV sets are produced?
A. when B. the one where
C. that D. in which
Is this factory ______ color TV sets are produced?
A. which B. the one where
C. that D. in which
This is the factory ______ produces color TV sets.
A. where B. the one where
C. that D. in which
【2010天津】—Can you believe I had to pay 30 dollars for a haircut?
—You should try the barber’s ______ I go. It’s only 15.
A. as B. which C. where D. that
【2011陕西】I walked up to the top of the hill with my friend, ______ we enjoyed a splendid view of the lake.
A. which B. where C. who D. that
【2011福建】She has a gift for creating an atmos- phere for her students ______ allows them to communicate freely with each other.
A. which B. where C. what D. who
【2012江西】By 16:30, ______ was almost closing time, nearly all the paintings had been sold.
A. which B. when C. what D. that
【2013山东】Finally he reached a lonely island ______ was completely cut off from the outside world.
A. when B. where C. which D. whom






只能用that不能用which的情况




先行词是anything, something, nothing, everything等不定代词时
关系代词一般只用that，不用which。
I. He never reads anything ______ is not worth reading.
A. which B. as C. who D. that
II. Is there anything ______ to you?
A. that is belonged B. that belongs
C. that belong D. which belongs
III. 【2010全国2】I refuse to accept the blame for something ______ was someone else’s fault.
A. who B. that C. as D. what
先行词是all, much，little, none或先行词被all, much, little, no, any修饰时
关系词只能用that, 不能用which。
All the people that are present burst into tears.
IV. These people once had fame and fortune; now ______ is left to them is utter poverty.
A. all that B. all what
C. all which D. that all
V. There is not much ______ can be done.
A. that B. which
C. what D. how
VI. 【2010浙江】______ that’s important is that you are doing your best and moving in the right direction.
A. One B. All
C. Everything D. Anything
VII. There is no difficulty ______ can’t be overcome in the world.
A. that B. which
C. who D. what
VIII. All the apples ______ fell down were eaten by the pigs.
A. that B. those
C. which D. what
You can take any seat ______ is free.
A. that B. / C. which D. it
先行词被最高级、序数词以及 the first, the last, the very, the only, the same修饰时
被这类词修饰时，关系代词常用that，不用which。
IX. The most important thing ______ we should pay attention to is the first thing ______ I have said.
A. which; that B. that; which
C. which; which D. that; that
X. My watch is not the only thing ______ is missing.
A. that B. it
C. which D. who
XI. The TV play I watched last night is the best one ______ I have watched this year.
A. which B. what
C. whose D. that
XII. This is the very film ______ I’ve long wished to see.
A. which B. that
C. who D. whom
XIII. I like the second football match ______ was held last week.
A. which B. who
C. that D. /
XIV. This is the last time ______ I shall come here to help you.
A. that B. which
C. when D. what
XV. It’s the third time ______ late this month.
A. that you arrived B. when you arrived
C. that you’ve arrived D. when you’ve arrived
先行词有两个，一个指人，一个指物，关系代词用that
XVI. We’re talking about the piano and the pianist ______ were in the concert we attended last night.
A. which B. whom C. who D. that
XVII. Both the girl and her dog ______ were crossing the street were hit by a coming car.
A. which B. who C. they D. that
XVIII. All the passengers and suitcases ______ were still waiting on the broken down bus had to be transferred to another long distance bus.
A. they B. who C. which D. that
He talked a lot about things and persons ______ they remembered in the school.
A. which B. that C. whom D. what
注意：关系副词不受这些规则的影响
只是(答疑qq 329950885)在选用关系代词时才使用这些规则。如：
XIX. 【2010福建】Stephen Hawking believes that the earth is unlikely to be the only planet ______ life has developed gradually.
A. that B. where C. which D. whose
XX. This is the same house ______ her grandfather was born.
A. that B. where C. which D. whose



其他有关关系词选择的规则




关系代词直接放在介词后面时，要用which，不用that；要用whom，不用who
第1章 【2011湖南】Julie was good at German, French and Russian , all of ______ she spoke fluently.
A. who B. whom C. which D. that
第2章 【2008湖南】The growing speed of a plant is influenced by a number of factors, ______ are beyond our control.
A. most of them B. most of which
C. most of what D. most of that
第3章 This is the museum ______ we saw an exhibition the other day.
A. that B. which C. where D. in that
第4章 【2009全国I】She brought with her three friends, none of ______ I had ever met before.
A. them B. who C. whom D. these
第5章 【2010浙江】The settlement is home to nearly 1,000 people, many of ______ left their village homes for a better life in the city.
A. whom B. which C. them D. those
第6章 【2012上海】Have you sent thank-you notes to the relatives from ______ you received gifts?
A. which B. them C. that D. whom
引导非限制性定语从句时，要用which, who, whom, 不用that，也不能省略
第7章 【2008浙江】Yesterday she sold her car, ______ she bought a month ago.
A. whom B. where C. that D. which
第8章 【2010全国1】As a child, Jack studied in a village school, ______ is named after his grandfather.
A. which B. where C. what D. that
第9章 【2012全国Ⅱ】That evening, ______ I will tell you more about later, I ended up working very late.
A. that B. which C. what D. when
当先行词前面有which，who等疑问代词时，为避免重复，用关系代词that
同理，当先行词是that, those时，常用关系代词which或who。如：
What’s that which is under the desk？
在桌子底下的那些东西是什么？
Which is the T-shirt that fits me most?
第10章 Who is the person ______ is standing at the gate of Beijing Tourism Tower?
A. who B. that C. which D. whom
第11章 Who ______ has common sense will do such a thing?
A. which B. who C. whom D. that
Those ______ not only from books but also through practice will succeed.
A. learn B. who C. that learns D. who learn
关系代词在从句中作表语或there be结构中的实意主语时, that可指人或物，且通常省略
(概括为：在从句中位于be后。此条仅作了解)
He still talks like the man （that） he was ten years ago.
他谈起话来仍像十年前一样。
The train is the fastest train （that） there has ever been.
这列火车是有史以来最快的火车。
My typewriter is not the machine (that) it was.
我的打字机已不是过去的机器了。
第12章 She was no longer the woman ______ she was.
A. that B. which C. what D. who
第13章 She is no longer the sweet girl ______ she used to be.
A. what B. who C. when D. that
当先行词为one, ones, anyone, everyone, none, all(指人)时，关系代词常用who
Anyone who is against us is our enemy. 任何反对我们的人就是我们的敌人。
All who heard the story were amazed.所有听到这个故事的人都很惊讶。





whose可指人也可指物




whose 作关系代词可以指人也可指物，用作定语。
若指物，它还可以同of which互换; 若指人，则不可与of whom互换
He lives in a house. Its window faces south.
→He lives in a house whose window faces south.
He lives in a house. The window of it faces south.
→He lives in a house, the window of which faces south.
→He lives in a house, of which the window faces south.
He is the farmer. His son is studying in Qinghua University.
由于(答疑qq 329950885)我们一般说his son，不说the son of him; 说my book, 不说the book of me, 因此我们只能说:
He is the farmer whose son is studying in Qinghua University.
而不能说：He is the farmer, the son of whom is studying in Qinghua University.
名词前有冠词the时用of which, 名词前没有冠词时用whose
1 I saw some trees ______ the leaves were black with disease.
A. where B. of which C. in which D. whose

2 【2010陕西】The old temple, ______ roof was damaged in storm, is now under repair.
A. where B. which
C. its D. whose
3 【2011全国I】The prize will go to the writer ______ story shows the most imagination.
A. that B. which
C. whose D. what
4 【2008陕西】The man pulled out a gold watch, ______ were made of small diamonds.
A. the hands of whom B. whom the hands of
C. which the hands of D. the hands of which
5 【2009安徽】Many children, ______ parents are away working in big cities，are taken good care of in the village.
A. their B. whose
C. of them D. with whom
6 【2012天津】 I wish to thank Professor Smith, without ______ help I would never have got this far.
A. who B. whose
C. whom D. which
7 【2013福建】The book tells stories of the earthquake through the eyes of those ______ lives were affected.
A. whose B. that
C. who D. which



as, but, than用作关系代词




as引导限制性定语从句
例题：I had never heard such an interesting story ______ you told me yesterday.
A. that B. which C. as D. that/which
有些同学可能选择D，这说明有关定语从句的基本知识学得不错，但知识还是有漏洞。
要记住：
如果先行词被such, the same, so+形容词+a/an，as+形容词+a/an修饰时，这时关系词我们要用as。
此时，as同that, who, which, whom一样，是关系代词，代指the same, so, such和as引导的短语，常译作“正如，像”，在定语从句中通常作主语、宾语和表语。
在限制性定语从句中要用关系代词as的，常见的有以下四种情况：
先行词被such修饰时，构成“such…as…”。
It’s such a heavy stone as nobody can move.
（as作宾语）那是一块重得没人能移得动的石头。
Don’t trust such men as praise you to your face.
(as作主语) 不要相信那种当面吹捧你的人。
先行词被the same修饰时，构成“the same…as…”。
We have arrived at the same conclusion as they have. (as作宾语)
我们已得出和他们同样的结论。
This is the same watch as I lost. (as作宾语)
这与我丢的那块表一样。
在 “as…as…” 句型中，第一个as后面跟名词时。
它可以看作是 “as+形容词+as” 的一种变化形式。
He is as good as his brother. 他和他弟弟一样好。
这句话还可以表达为：
He is as good a boy as his brother.
It’s as pleasant a film as I have ever seen. (as作宾语)
这是一部和我以往看的同样好的电影。
（参看P25考点3）
在“so+形+冠+n. + as”句型中 (He is so good a student as every teacher likes.)
它可以看作是先行词被such修饰时关系代词用as（第一种情况）的一种变化形式。
He is such a good student as every teacher likes.
他是一个每个老师都喜欢的这样一个好学生。
用so可以表达为：
He is so good a student as every teacher likes.
（参看P.25考点3）
the same…as与the same…that
the same…as指同一类，the same…that指同一个。
I bought the same car as yours.
我买的那辆汽车和你的一模一样。
This is the same bag (the very bag) that I lost yesterday.
这就是我昨天丢失的那个包。
That is the same man that asked for help the day before yesterday.
那就是前天来求助的同一个人。
such…as 和such….that的区别（该用定语从句还是用结果状语从句）
such…as “像……样的”，as引导的是定语从句, as作句子成分；
such…that“如此……以至于”，that引导的是结果状语从句, that不作句子成分。
判断办法：
如果后面成分完整，用that来引导结果状语从句；
如果后面句子成分不完整，则用as来引导定语从句。
It was so difficult a problem ______ no one worked it out.
（成分完整，结果状语从句, 填that）译为：
这道题如此难以至于没有人算得出来。
It was so difficult a problem ______ no one worked out.
（成分不完整，定语从句, 填as）译为：
这是一道没有人能算出来的难题。
练习
He is such a lazy man ______ nobody wants to work with ______.
A. as; him B. that; /
C. as; / D. whom; him
It wasn’t such a good present ______ he had promised me.
A. that B. as C. which D. what
These houses are sold at such a low price ______ people expected.
A. like B. as C. that D. which
He isn’t such a man ______ he used to be.
A. who B. whom C. that D. as
He is not such a man _______ would leave his work half done.
A. that B. which C. who D. as
We should read such books ______ will make us better and wiser.
A. when B. as C. whose D. what
This is such a heavy box ______ I can’t move it.
A. as B. that
C. which D. whose
Pop music is such an important part of society ______ it has even influenced our language.
A. as B. that C. which D. where
Last term our English teacher set so difficult an examination problem ______ none of us worked out.
A. as B. that C. which D. whose
The man showed us so heavy a stone ______ no one can lift.
A. that B. as C. which D and
I received ______ nice a gift ______ my mother promised.
A. the same; as B. as; as
C. such; as D. the same; that
I want to use the same tools ______ used in your factory a few days ago.
A. as was B. which was
C. as were D. which
I have bought the same dress ______ she is wearing.
A. as B. that C. which D. what
I found the book just ______ I borrowed yesterday so I got it back at once.
A. the same that B. the same as
C. such as D. such that
Tom did not take away the camera because it was just the same camera ______ he lost last week.
A. which B. that C. whom D. as
but用作关系代词（选学内容）
but既可指人，也可指物，常在定语从句中充当主语。but本身含“否定”的意思，其作用相当于“that ／which ／who．．．not”。它前面的主句通常有“否定”的词（如：no，not， little，few，hardly等）。(为了快速培养语感，也可把but意译为“除了”)。
There is no mother but loves her own children.
（＝There is no mother that／who does not love her own children. ）没有不爱自己孩子的母亲。
There is no man but feels pity for the starving children.
没有人不为这些饥饿的孩子感到同情。
There are very few but admire his talents.（but = who don’t）很少有人不赞赏他的才干。
There is no rule but has exception.
凡规则都有例外。
than用作关系代词 （选学内容）
than在定语从句中作关系代词，在从句中可以充当主语、宾语、表语，但仍以充当主语为多。在定语从句中，它与关系代词that所起的语法作用是差不多的，只是在翻译或解释时，要比that多一层比较的意味。另外，由than含有比较意味可知，该类定语从句的先行词前通常要有形容词的比较级形式。如：
You make more money than is intended to make.(主语)你挣得的钱比预计的要多。
There were more casualties than was reported.
伤亡人数比报道的要多。
Newspapers and other media do more than simply record what happens.
报纸和其他媒体做的不仅仅是记录发生的事情。



as作关系代词很有用（P. 231）





关系副词




关系副词在定语从句中作状语
【2008北京】I’ll give you my friend’s home address,
______ I can be reached most evenings.
A. which B. when C. whom D. where
【2008安徽】All the neighbors admire this family, ______ the parents are treating their child like a friend.
A. why B. where C. which D. that
【2009重庆】Life is like a long race ______ we compete with others to go beyond ourselves.
A. why B. what C. that D. where
【2012重庆】Sales director is a position ______ communication ability is just as important as sales ability.
A. which B. that C. when D. where
【2012浙江】We live in an age ______ more information is available with great ease than ever before.
A. why B. when
C. to whom D. on which
【2013四川】Nowadays people are more concerned about the environment ______ they live.
A. what B. which C. when D. where
the way作先行词
首先要确定the way在定语从句中作什么成分。如果the way在定语从句中作主语或宾语，要选用关系代词。如：
I don’t like the way ______ will cost too much money.
The way ______ he thought of to solve the problem was not practical.
在句1中，the way在定语从句中作主语，因此要填关系代词that/which。
在句2中，the way在定语从句中作宾语，因此也要用关系代词：that/which/省略。
如果the way在定语从句中作状语(定语从句还原后是in the way)，关系词用下面三种情况的任一种：
①in which；②that；③省略。
The way ______ he answered the question was surprising.
A. how B. that
C. in which D. / E. B/C/D
定语从句恢复为完整的一句话后为：He answered the question in the way.
in the way在定语从句中作状语，因此选E。
The way ______ he looks at problems is wrong.
A. which B. whose C. what D./
That is not the way ______ I do it.
A. / B. which
C. for which D. with which
This is the only way ______ you can find.
A. that B. / C. in which
D. A, B and C E. A and B
I don’t like the way ______ he spoke to his mother.
A. that B. /
C. in which D. A, B and C
situation, case, point, business等作先行词
【2007江西】After graduation she reached a point in her career ______ she needed to decide what to do.
A. that B. what C. which D. where
【2009浙江】I have reached a point in my life______ I am supposed to make decisions of my own.
A. which B. where C. how D. why
【2003上海】I can think of many cases ______ students obviously knew a lot of English words and expressions but couldn’t write a good essay.
A. why B. which C. as D. where
【2008江西】Later in this chapter cases will be introduced to readers ______ consumer complaints have resulted in changes in the law.
A. where B. when C. who D. which
【2004湖南】I work in a business ______ almost everyone is waiting for a great chance.
A. how B. which C. where D. that
【2009福建】It’s helpful to put children in a situation
______ they can see themselves differently.
A. that B. when
C. which D. where
In experiments ______ young teens are allowed to sleep as long as they want, they tend to sleep an average of hours.
A. that B. which
C. where D. when
occasion(时机)作先行词时关系副词用when
It was a rare -indeed unique occasion when I was able to put Ritchie right.
when引导非限制性定语从句
It was an exciting moment for these football fans this year, ______ for the first time in years their team won the world cup.
A. that B. while
C. which D. when
The rainbow can’t be seen at noon, ______ the sun is high in the sky.
A. while B. when C. so D. that
Christmas is the only time of the year, ______ men and women open their hearts freely and think of other people.
A. while B. when C. so D. that
We played in the garden till sunset, ______ it began to rain.
A. when B. after C. while D. then






关系词的省略(仅供了解)




关系代词的省略
关系代词作宾语时的省略
当关系代词在非限制性定语从句中用作动词宾语或介词宾语，(答疑qq 329950885)且关系代词不直接位于介词后面时，可以省略。如：
Is there anything (that) you want?
想要什么东西吗?
Who is the man (that, who, whom) you were talking to? 刚才和你讲话的人是谁?
但是，如果是直接用于介词后作宾语或位于非限制性定语从句中，则不可省略。如：
This is the room in which I live.
这是我住的那间房间。
He met Mary at the party, whom he married a week later.
关系代词在从句中作表语或there be结构中作实意主语时
用关系代词that, that可指人或物，且常省略。如：
China is not the country (that) it was in the old times. 中国已不是旧时代的中国了。
The old man is not the man (that) he was. 这个老人已不是以前那个样子了。
The wisdom she gave me has helped shape the person I am today.
她给我的智慧把我塑造成现在的样子。
This is the fastest computer （that） there has ever been.这是有史以来运算最快的计算机。
关系副词的省略
关系副词when的省略
用作时间状语的关系副词when通常不能省略，但若用于day, year, time, the moment等少数几个词后时可以省略(也可换成that)。如：
That was the year (that) I first went abroad.
就是那一年我第一次出国了。
I’ll never forget the day (that) we met.
我永远也忘不了我们见面的那一天。
By the time (when) he was fourteen years old, Einstein had learnt advanced mathematics all by himself.
到14岁时，爱因斯坦已经自学了高等数学。
Do you still remember the day (when) we first met?
你还记得我们第一次见面的那一天吗？
关系副词where的省略
用作地点状语的关系副词where通常不能省略，但若用于place, somewhere, anywhere, everywhere, nowhere等几个词后时可以省略(也可换成that)。如：
This is (答疑qq 329950885)the place (where) we met for the first time.
这是我们第一次见面的地方。
Do you have anywhere (that) I can lie down for an hour?
你有没有一个什么地方可以让我躺一个小时？
关系副词why的省略
关系副词why通常只用于the reason后引导定语从句，且通常可换成that或for which，均可省略。如：
That’s the reason (why, for which, that) he came.
这就是他来的原因。
Give me one reason (why) we should help you. 给我举出一个我们应当帮助你的理由。





介词＋关系代词




关系代词直接跟在介词后时，只可用whom或 which, 不可用who, that
(参看P. 94)
from where为“介词＋关系副词”结构，可以引导定语从句
如： We stood at the top of the hill, from where we can see the town.

1. China is the birthplace of kites, ______ kite flying spread to Japan, Korea, Thailand and India.
A. from that B. from where
C. from there D. from here
像look after, look for等固定短语动词
在定语从句中一般不宜将介词与动词分开。如：
This is the boy whom she has taken care of.
2. This is the baby ______ tomorrow.
A. after whom I shall look
B. whom I shall look after
C. whose I shall look after
D. after whom I shall look after
部分与整体用of
some of us, many of them
3. The course normally attracts 20 students per year, ______ up to half will be from overseas.
A. in which B. for which
C. with which D. of whom
4. There are many books on science, ______ this is one example.
A. which B. from which
C. of which D. into which
5. 【2008四川】For many cities in the world, there is no room to spread out further, ______ New York is an example.
A. for which B. in which
C. of which D. from which
6. 【2012四川】In our class there are 46 students, ______ half wear glasses.
A. in whom B. in them
C. of whom D. of them
介词的选择：看前看后看意思
看与先行词的搭配
7. The bicycle ______ he often rides needs repairing.
A. on which B. in which
C. by which D. with which
8. Human facial expressions differ from those of animals in the degree ______ they can be controlled on purpose.
A. with which B. to which
C. of which D. for which
9. 【2012全国Ⅱ】100℃ is the temperature ______ which water will boil.
A. for B. at C. on D. of
10. The world ______ is made up of matter.
A. in that we live B. on which we live
C. where we live in D. we live in
11. 【2008上海】We went through a period ______ communications were very difficult in the rural areas.
A. which B. whose
C. in which D. with which
12. 【2012湖南】Care of the soul is a gradual process
______ even the small details of life should be considered.
A. what B. in what C. which D. in which
看谓语的搭配
13. The two things ______ they felt very proud are Jim’s gold watch and Della’s hair.
A. about which B. of which
C. in which D. for which
14. Henry set up a club for football fans, ______ he invited all his friends.
A. for whom B. to whom
C. to which D. from which
15. 【2010上海】Wind power is an ancient source of energy ______ we may return in the near future.
A. on which B. by which
C. to which D. from which
16. Is this just the city ______ the foreign guests wish to pay a visit ______.
A. which; in B. to which; /
C. that; to D. to that; /
17. He is a man of great experience, ______ much can be learned.
A. who B. that
C. from which D. from whom
18. In the dark street, there wasn’t a single person ______ she could turn for help.
A. whom B. who
C. to whom D. form whom
19. The pen ______ he is writing is mine.
A. with which B. in which
C. on which D. by which
20. Last summer we visited the West Lake, ______ Hangzhou is famous in the world.
A. for which B. for that
C. in which D. what
21. 【2009陕西】Gun control is a subject ______ Americans have argued for a long time.
A. of which B. with which
C. about which D. into which
根据句子意思
22. The clever boy made a hole in the wall, ______ he could see ______ was going on inside the house.
A. which; what B. through which; what
C. through that; what D. what; that
23. In the office I never seem to have time until after 5:30 p.m., ______ many people have gone home.
A. whose time B. that
C. on which D. by which time
24. 【2008上海春】Villagers here depend on the fishing industry, ______ there won’t be much work.
A. where B. that
C. by which D. without which
25. 【2008福建】By nine o’clock, all the Olympic torch bearers had reached the top of Mount Qomolangma, ______ appeared a rare rainbow soon.
A. of which B. on which
C. from which D. above which





限制性定语从句与非限制性定语从句

限制性定语从句 非限制性定语从句
形式上 不用逗号和主句隔开 用逗号和主句隔开
意义上 是先行词不可缺少的定语，起“指定是哪一个”的作用，去掉后句意不完整 是对先行词的补充说明，删除后句子意思仍完整
译法上 翻译成先行词的定语，“……的……” 通常翻译成主句的并列句
关系词的使用上 A. 作宾语时可省略; B.可用that; C. 可用who代替whom；D.可用why A. 不可省; B. 不用that; C. 不用who代替whom; D. why要换为for which




限制性定语从句和非限制性定语从句的区别
限制性定语从句紧跟先行词，与先行词之间一般不加逗号，仅修饰先行词，可以由关系代词、关系副词或that来引导。非限制性定语从句仅作补充或说明，用逗号与主句隔开，既可修饰先行词，又可修饰整个主句，不可用that引导。如：
a) This is the house which we bought last month.这是我们上个月买的那幢房子。（限制性）
b) The house, which we bought last month, is very nice.这幢房子很漂亮，是我们上个月买的。（非限制性）
c) I lost my money that day, for which I had to walk home.(非限制性，for which不能换为why)
d) He met with a pretty girl in the park, whom he fell in love at first sight. (非限制性，whom不能换为who)
当先行词是专有名词或由物主代词和指示代词所修饰时，其后的定语从句通常是非限制性的。如：
Charles Smith, who was my former teacher, retired last year.
查理·史密斯去年退休了，他曾经是我的老师。
My house, which I bought last year, has got a lovely garden. 我的房子，去年买的，带着个漂亮的花园。
This novel, which I have read three times, is very touching. 这本小说很动人，我已经读了三遍。
练习
翻译下列句子，注意体会限制性定语从句和非限制性定语从句在表达意思上的区别。
He has a brother who is a physicist.
He has a brother, who is a physicist.
He returned all the books which are written in English.
He returned all the books, which are written in English.
The man who lives next door is a doctor.
My sister, who lives next door, is a doctor.
A student who studies hard will make good progress.
The student, who lives far from school, is the captain of their football team.
as, which引导的非限制性定语从句
as引导的非限制性定语从句位置较灵活，可以位于主句前面、(答疑qq 329950885)中间或后面，一般用逗号与主句隔开，但which所引导的非限制性定语从句只能放在主句之后。
as引导非限制性定语从句，常带有“正如”。当从句为否定时不能用as。
as, which 可指代整个主句，也可指代主句的一部分。
非限制性定语从句将整个主句作为先行词, 对其进行修饰, 这时从句谓语动词要用第三人称单数。
as is often the case是常用说法，意为“像往常那样；正如经常发生的那样”。
He returned home safe and sound after a fierce battle, ______ was unexpected.
A. which B. as C. that D. it
【2010四川】After graduating from college，I took some time off to go travelling, ______ turned out to be a wise decision.
A. that B. which C. when D. where
Eric received training in computer for one year, ______ he found a job in a big company.
A. after that B. after which
C. after it D. after this
You were very impolite to him, for ______ you should make an apology to him, I think.
A. this B. which C. what D. that
【2011北京】Mary was much kinder to Jack than she was to the others, ______, of course, made all the others upset.
A. who B. which C. what D. that
His movie won several awards at the film festival, ______ was beyond his wildest dream.
A. which B. that C. where D. it
【2009全国II】 My friend showed me round the town, ______ was very kind of him.
A. which B. that C. where D. it
【2012北京】When deeply absorbed in work, ______ he often was，he would forget all about eating or sleeping.
A. that B. which C. where D. when
【2013安徽】Mo Yan was awarded the Nobel Prize for Literature in 2012, ______ made one of the Chinese people’s long-held dreams come true.
A. it B. that C. what D. which
【2012福建】The air quality in the city, ______ is shown in the report, has improved over the past two months.
A. that B. it C. as D. what
______ might be expected, the response to the question was very mixed.
A. As B. That C. It D. What
【2013山东】There is no simple answer, ______ is often the case in science.
A. as B. that C. when D. where
【2013陕西】______ is often the case with children, Amy was better by the time the doctor arrived.
A. It B. That C. What D. As
The Beatles, ______ many of you are told enough to remember, came from Liverpool.
A. what B. that C. how D. as



as, which 引导非限制性定语从句
（P. 231）
使用非限制性定语从句，是写出长的高级句子的最常用的方法（P. 231）





同位语从句和定语从句




例题：
He told me the news this morning ______ his father had come back.
A. which B. that C. which or that
答案是B。那么A为什么不可以呢？
要弄明白这个问题，就要搞清楚定语从句和同位语从句的区别。
同位语从句和定语从句很相似，但还是有区别的，区别主要在以下三方面：
1. 从词类上区别
同位语从句前面的名词只能是idea, fact, news, hope, belief, suggestion, proposal, word, thought, doubt, truth, possibility, promise, order等有一定内涵的名词；而定语从句的先行词可以是名词、代词，主句的一部分或是整个主句。如:
We are now looking into the question whether he is worth trusting.
我们正在调查的问题不是他是否值得信赖的问题。（同位语从句）
Word came that he had been abroad.
据说他已经出国了。（同位语从句）
Our team has won the game, which made us very happy.
我们队赢了,这让我们很高兴。（定语从句）
The doctor whom you are looking for is in the room.
你找的那位医生在房间里面。（定语从句）
2. 从性质上区别
定语从句对其先行词起修饰或限制作用，功能上相当于形容词；而同位语从句是对前面抽象名词的进一步的说明和解释，是名词的具体内容，属于名词性从句的范畴。如:
The news that our team has won the game was true.
我们队赢了那场比赛的消息是真的。
（同位语从句，说明news到底是一个什么消息）
The news that he told me yesterday was true.
昨天他告诉我的那个消息是真的。
（定语从句, 指他告诉我的消息）
I made a promise that if anyone set me free I would make him very rich.
我许诺如果谁让我自由,我就让他非常富有。
（同位语从句,补充说明promise的内容）
The mother made a promise that pleased all her children.
妈妈做出了一个令她的孩子们高兴的许诺。
（定语从句, promise在从句中作pleased的主语）
3. 引导词上的区别
引导词that
引导词that引导定语从句时，作从句的一个成分，有时可用which替换，作宾语时常常省略；而that在同(答疑qq 329950885)位语从句中仅起连接作用,不充当任何成分，并且不能省略，也不能用which来代替。
例：判断下列句子是同位语从句还是定语从句。
The order that we should send a few people to help the other groups was received yesterday.
我们应派几个人去帮别的小组的命令昨天收到了。
The order that we received yesterday was that we should send a few people to help the other groups.
我们昨天收到的命令是我们应该派几个人去帮助别的几个小组。
解析：
①是同位语从句，是对order的具体解释，that虽不作成分，不能换为which, 也不能省略。
②是定语从句，是名词order的修饰语，that在从句中作received的宾语，可以换为which，也可以省略。
how, whether, what虽不能引导定语从句，却可引导同位语从句
who, whose, whom, which, when, where, why除引导定语从句外，也可引导同位语从句。（参看P. 107第1讲）
定语从句的引导词在意思上反映的是先行词的意思，而同位语从句的引导词在意思上和前面的词没有联系。
The reason that he gave for his coming late was not true.
The reason that his alarm clock was broken was not true.
在①中，that的意思是reason, 在定语从句中作give的宾语。在②句中，that只起连接作用，不含有the reason的意思。
The suggestion where he stressed the importance of exercising was very practical.
The suggestion where we should exercise regularly is very practical.
在句③中，where意为“在这个建议中（in the suggestion）”，反映的是先行词的意思；在句④中，where指的是锻炼身体的地方，和the suggestion没有联系。
在定语从句中，关系副词可以换为“介词+关系代词”，而引导同位语从句的连接副词却不能换为“介词+连接代词”的形式。
在上面的句③中，where可以换为in which；在句④中，where不能换为in which。
例：判断下列句子是同位语从句还是定语从句。
That question whether we need it has not been considered.
I have no idea what has happened to him.
I haven’t answered the question how I will deal with it.
The school where Bob studies is in the middle of the city.
The decision when we should get started hasn’t been made.
解析：
①、②、③是同位语从句，它们是在说明前面词的内容, whether, what和how不能引导定语从句。
④是定语从句，where反映的是先行词的意思，可以换为in which。
⑤是同位语从句。从句是在说明decision的内容。when并没有反映the decision的意思。when也不能改为 at which time。
练习
【2004上海春】Along with the letter was his promise ______ he would visit me this coming Christmas.
A. which B. that C. what D. whether
You can depend on whatever promise ______ he makes.
A. / B. why C. when D. whose
The news ______ he has been elected president of the United States is true.
A. that B which C. what D. where
The news ______ you told me yesterday is true.
A. that B when C. what D. where
【2006重庆】Nobody believed his reason for being absent from the class ______ he had to meet his uncle at the air port.
A. why B. that C. where D. because
Is this the reason ______ he explained at the meeting for his carelessness in his work?
A. that B. what C. how D. why
Galileo collected the facts ______ proved the earth and all the other planets move around the sun.
A. that B. which C. / D. A and B
Galileo discovered the fact ______ the earth and all the other planets move around the sun.
A. that B. which C. / D. A and B
【2006安徽】A warm thought suddenly came to me ______ I might use the pocket money to buy some flowers for my mother’s birthday.
A. if B. when C. that D. which
【2012上海】There is much truth in the idea ______ kindness is usually served by frankness.
A. why B. which C. that D. whether






定语从句与易混句型




知识准备：简单句、并列句和复合句
（参看P. 63考点5）
定语从句与同位语从句
（参看P. 102第11讲）
定语从句与地点状语从句
例题：
Rice?doesn’t grow well ______ there is not enough water. A. where B. in which
有的同学认为两个答案都对，解释说where可以换为in which。
而正确答案只能是A，因为在这里where引导的是地点状语(答疑qq 329950885)从句而不是定语从句。在定语从句中关系副词where可以换为“介词＋关系代词”，而在状语从句中则不能这样换。
辨别方法：定语从句有先行词而状语从句没有先行词。试比较：
I?still?remember?the?farm ______ my parents worked ten years ago. A. where B. on which
本题A，B两个答案都行，因为本句where引导的是定语从句，先行词是the farm。
第9讲 Go and get your coat. It’s ______ you left it.
A. there B. where
C. there where D. where there
第10讲 When you read the book, you’d better make a mark ______ you have any questions.
A. at which B. at where
C. the place D. where
第11讲 The house stood ______ there had been a rock.
A. which B. at which
C. when D. where
第12讲 【2006四川】—Mom, what did your doctor say?
—He advised me to live ______ the air is fresher.?
A. in where B. in which
C. the place where D. where?
第13讲 【2006天津】If you are traveling ______ the customs are really foreign to your own, please do as the Romans do.?
A. in which B. what
C. when D. where?
定语从句与结果状语从句
这里主要指such．．．as／that （参看P. 96考点3）
定语从句与并列句
例：A. them B. they C. whom
a) He has three daughters, none?of ______ is an engineer.
b) He?has?three?daughters, but?none?of ______ is a dancer.
c) He has three daughters; ______ are doctors.
并列句有像and，but，so等并列连词或分号连接，这时就不必再用关系词了；而定语从句中，关系词起着连接作用，不必要再用and, but，so等连词。
（参看“两个主谓结构时”P.63考点5）
答案：① C ② A ③ B
第14讲 【2013浙江】The children, ______ had played the whole day long, were worn out.
A. all of what B. all of which
C. all of them D. all of whom
第15讲 I have five friends, but none of ______ are business- men.
A. that B. whom C. they D. them
第16讲 I have five friends, ______ are businessmen.
A. that B. who C. they D. them
第17讲 【2012山东】Maria has written two novels, both of ______ have been made into television series.
A. them B. that C. which D. what
第18讲 _____ is reported in the newspaper, talks between the two countries are making progress.
A. It B. As C. What D. That
第19讲 ______ is reported in the newspaper that talks between the two countries are making progress.
A. It B. As C. What D. That
第20讲 ______ talks between the two countries are making progress is reported in the newspaper.
A. It B. As C. What D. That
第21讲 ____ is reported in the newspaper is that talks between the two countries are making progress.
A. It B. As C. What D. That
第22讲 The young mother saw her baby fall to the ground, ______ brought her heart to her mouth.
A. it B. and that C. and which D. that
第23讲 He studied hard and later became a well-known writer, ______ his father expected.
A. that was what B. what was that
C. and which was D. which was what
第24讲 They believed that the spirits are with the body of the dead person for three days; ______ there is always someone to stay with the dead person.
A. during this time B. during which time
C. during which D. during when
定语从句与独立主格结构
有关系词引导的定义从句要有完整的谓语，而独立主格结构则没有完整的谓语，且不需要连接词。
（参看P. 82考点2）
定语从句与强调句型
看下面两个题：
It was on the National Day ______ she met with her separated sister.
A. that B. where C. when D. which
（选C可以吗？为什么？）
—When did you get to know him?
—It was on the morning of May 1st ______ I was playing in the park.
A. that B. when C. where D. which
（选A可以吗？为什么？）
在①中，如果选C，把后面看作定语从句，语法上也说得过去，“是在她遇到与她分别的妹妹的那个国庆节”，但什么是在这个国庆节？语义不完整。如果把when she met with her separated sister看作时间状语，把it看作表示时间，这样怎样？还是不行！需要把on去掉才行！（参看P. 117 0）因此要选A，她遇到她分别的妹妹是在国庆节。这样语义就完整了。我们可以看出：
该用强调句型的如果用定语从句，语义不完整。
在②中，如果选A的话，则译为“我在公园玩是在五一的上午（而不是别的时间）”。这样，就是所答非所问了。选B的话，译为“是在我在公园玩的那个五一的上午”。因此答案为B。这时可以看作句子后面省略了that I got to know him。我们可以看出：
该用定语从句的，如果用按强调句型去理解，所答非所问。
第25讲 【2008全国II】It was in New Zealand ______ Elizabeth first met Mr. Smith.
A. that B. how C. which D. when
第26讲 It was on the National Day ______ she met with her separated sister.
A. that B. where C. when D. which
第27讲 It was evening ______ we reached the little town of Winchester.
A. that B. until C. since D. before
第28讲 It?is?our parents ______ we?depend?on?when?we?are?in trouble.
A. who B. whom C. that D. /
第29讲 【2007 山东】—Where did you get to know her?
—It was on the farm ______ we worked.
A. that B. there C. which D. where




定语从句的其他常见考点




分隔定语从句
定语从句一般紧跟在先行词之后，但定语从句与先行词之间有时也会插入别的成分，构成先行词与定语从句的隔离。如：
This is the article written by him that I spoke to you about.
He was the only person in this country who was invited.
在①中，定语从句与先行词被written by him分隔；
在②中，定语从句与先行词被in this country分隔。

I. 【2011福建】She has a gift for creating an atmosphere for her students ______ allows them to communicate freely with each other.
A. which B. where C. what D. who
II. 【2011上海】You’ll find taxis waiting at the bus station ______ you can hire to reach your host family.
A. which B. where C. when D. as
III. 【2011天津】The days are gone ______ physical strength was all you needed to make a living.
A. when B. that C. where D. which
IV. 【2012江苏】After the flooding, people were suffering in that area, ______ urgently needed clean water, medicine and shelter to survive.
A. which B. who
C. where D. what
V. 【2013江苏】The president of the World Bank says he has a passion for China ______, he remembers starting as early as his childhood.
A. where B. which C. what D. when
one of, the one of, the only one of
例题：选用is、are填空
Tom is one of the students who ______ good at playing football.
Tom is the only/very one of the students who ______ good at playing football.
Tom is the one of the students who ______ good at playing football.
在①中，定语从句的先行词是the students, 这些学生(答疑qq 329950885)都擅长踢足球，而Tom是他们中的一个, 因此who代指的是the students, 因此填are。
在②中，Tom就是那些学生中唯一擅长踢足球的那一个。擅长踢足球的只有一人，因此，who代指一个人，后面填is。此时，先行词是the one。此时，the one有两个定语，of the students和后面的定语从句。
第③句同第②句差不多。擅长踢足球的还是只有一人，因此，先行词是the one，要填is。
因此，我们可以发现这样的规律：
one of 后跟名词复数时, 后面定语从句的先行词是of后面的名词复数，从句谓语用复数；
the one of/ the only one of后跟名词复数时，后面定语从句的先行词是the one/the only one，从句谓语用单数。
精品-高中英语语法通霸-7.定语从句语法常考点专项总结归纳讲解与高考真题详细分类练习题及答案.doc

VI. 【1994上海】She is one of the few girls who ______ in the kindergarten.
A. is well paid B. are well paid
C. is paying well D. are paying well
VII. It is one of the best books ______.
A. that have ever been written
B. that has ever been written
C. which have been written
D. which has been written
VIII. Jack was the one of my classmates who ______ invited to attend the contest.
A. had B. have C. was D. were
IX. This is the very one of the most interesting films ______ shown last week.
A. which was B. that was
C. which were D. that were
X. 【2010全国Ⅱ】 Barbara is easy to recognize as she’s the only one of the women who ______ evening dress.
A. wear B. wears
C. has worn D. have worn
what不能引导定语从句, one 作同位语
XI. Meeting my uncle after all these years was an unforgettable moment, ______ I will always treasure.
A. that B. one C. it D. what
XII. Her sister has become a lawyer, ______ he wanted to be.
A. who B. that
C. what D. which
XIII. Miss Smith is a strict but good teacher, ______ often cares about our life and study at school.
A. one who B. whoever
C. the one D. the person
XIV. For Tim this was the beginning of a new life, ______ he thought he would never see.
A. what B. that C. one D. it
XV. 【2010山东】Helping others is a habit, ______ you can learn even at an early age.
A. it B. that C. what D. one
is this school the one与is this the school
看下面两题：
① Is this school ______ we visited three years ago?
A. the one B. which
C. that D. where
② Is this the school ______ we visited three years ago?
A. the one B. where
C. in which D. /
要简化难题，可把疑问句恢复成陈述句。在第一句中，恢复陈述句，is要放到school的后面。如果放到this的后面的话，就构成了this is school, 而school作为可数名词单数是不能单独使用的，前面要用冠词或物主代词或指示代词。（参看P. 12考点2）
两题的答案：A D
XVI. Is this photo ______ you took on the Great Wall that day?
A. which B. what C. the one D. that
XVII. Is this factory ______ some foreign friends visited last Friday?
A. that B. where C. which D. the one
XVIII. Is this the factory ______ he worked ten years ago?
A. that B. where C. which
XIX. Is this factory ______ color TV sets are produced.
A. which B. the one where
C. that D. in which
XX. This is the factory ______ produces color TV sets.
A. where B. the one where
C. that D. in which



综合运用本章所学定语从句内容（P. 232）




答案：


第七章 定语从句
相关概念
1.① who/that ② who /whom /that /不填
③ whose ④ whose
⑤ that /which ⑥ that /which /不填
⑦ who /whom /that /不填 ⑧ why
⑨ where ⑩ when
2.?① The movie (that we saw last night) is very exciting.
② Have you bought the book (which we talked about)?
③ I still remember the day (which we spent together last week).
④ He still lives in the house (whose windows face south).
⑤ The boy (whose father is a policeman ) speaks English most fluently in our class.
⑥ The girl (who you met) was John’s sister.
⑦ There is no reason (why we shouldn’t be friends).
⑧ They arrived in the early morning (when the sky was still dark).
⑨ The days were gone (when we had to travel on horses ).
⑩ Is this the hospital (where you were born)?
关系词的选择
1. A 2. D 3. A 4. A 5. B
6. C 7. A 8. A 9. B 10. C
11. D 12. D 13. D 14. B 15. C
16. C 17. B 18. A 19. A 20. C
只能用that不能用which的情况
1. D 2. B 3. B 4. A 5. A
6. B 7. A 8. A 9. A 10. D
11. A 12. D 13. B 14. C 15. A
16. C 17. D 18. D 19. D 20. B
21. B 22. B
其他有关关系词选择的规则
1. C 2. B 3. C 4. C 5. A
6. D 7. D 8. A 9. B 10. B
11. D 12. D 13. A 14. D
whose可指人也可指物
1. B 2. D 3. C 4. D 5. B
6. B 7. A
as, but, than用作关系代词
1. C 2. B 3. B 4. D 5. D
6. B 7. B 8. B 9. A 10. B
11. B 12. C 13. A 14. A 15. D
关系副词
1. D 2. B 3. D 4. D 5. B
6. D 7. D 8. A 9. E 10. D
11. D 12. B 13. D 14. A 15. C
16. D 17. C 18. D 19. B 20. B
21. A
介词﹢关系代词
1. B 2. B 3. D 4. C 5. C
6. C 7. A 8. B 9. B 10. D
11. C 12. D 13. B 14. C 15. C
16. B 17. D 18. C 19. A 20. A
21. C 22. B 23. D 24. D 25. D
限制性定语从句与非限制性定语从句
练习
他有一个当医生的兄弟。（不止一个兄弟，其中一个是医生。）
他有一个弟弟，是个医生。（只有一个弟弟。）
他把所有的英文书都归还了。（还有别的书没归还）
他把所有的书都归还了；这些书都是英文书。
住在我隔壁的那个人是个医生。
我姐姐是个医生，住在我的隔壁。
努力学习的学生会取得进步。
这个学生是他们校足球队的队长，他住得离学校很远。
1. A 2. B 3. B 4. B 5. B
6. A 7. A 8. B 9. D 10. C
11. A 12. A 13. D 14. D
同位语从句和定语从句
1. B 2. A 3. A 4. A 5. B
6. A 7. D 8. A 9. C 10. C
定语从句与易混句型
1. B 2. D 3. D 4. D 5. D
6. D 7. D 8. B 9. C 10. B
11. A 12. D 13. C 14. B 15. D
16. A 17. A 18. A 19. D 20. C
21. D
定语从句的其他常见考点
1. A 2. A 3. A 4. B 5. B
6. B 7. A 8. C 9. B 10. B
11. B 12. D 13. A 14. C 15. D
16. C 17. D 18. B 19. B 20. C